JP6659976B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning-type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”).

  Conventionally, in a general slot machine, after a game medal inserted from an insertion slot reaches a predetermined number of bets, a game is started by a predetermined start operation, and, for example, a reel rotates. Thereafter, the reel which has been rotated by a predetermined reel stop operation by the player is stopped, the presence or absence of a prize is determined according to the combination of symbols displayed when the reel is stopped, and a game such as a payout of a game medal is provided. You.

  In such a conventional slot machine, a game medal inserted through the insertion slot is guided to a game medal passage, and when a predetermined sensor (insertion sensor) provided in the game medal passage detects the medal, the game medal is received. A process of adding medals to the number of bets of a game (bet process) or a process of adding medals to the number of reserves (credit process) is performed. However, the bet processing and the credit processing are not always executable, and a state in which the bet processing and the credit processing can be performed (permitted state) and a state in which the bet processing cannot be performed, for example, while the reels are rotating (non-permitted state) Therefore, it is necessary to return the game medals inserted in the non-permitted state.

  Therefore, the above-described slot machine generally has a structure in which the game medal passage is branched into a permitted game medal passage and a non-permitted game medal passage, and a permitted position (ON state) is provided upstream of the branch point. And a blocker displaceable between a non-permission position (OFF state). More specifically, when the blocker is turned on in the permission state, the game medal is guided to the game medal path in the permission state, and in the non-permission state, the blocker is turned off, so that the game medal is turned off. Of the game medal (return port).

  Here, for example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a slot machine that prevents a game medal from being pinched while the blocker shifts from an OFF state to an ON state. The slot machine of Patent Literature 1 has a passage sensor for detecting a game medal upstream of a blocker in the game medal passage, and when the blocker in the OFF state is turned on, the passage sensor detects the game medal. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, data for turning on the blocker is stored in an RWM (Read Write Memory). By doing so, the blocker can be switched to the ON state after securing a sufficient grace time for the game medals detected by the passage sensor to pass through the blocker, and it is possible to prevent the game medals from being pinched by the blocker. it can.

JP-A-2006-137055 JP 2002-052133 A

By the way, the conventional slot machine includes main control means (main control board) for performing main control for controlling a game, and sub-control means (sub-control board) for performing sub-control for controlling effects and the like. The processing to be configured includes a main processing that mainly executes processing based on the progress of the game, and a timer interruption processing that executes a series of processing by periodic interruption. As an example of the timer interrupt process, there is a process of updating (subtracting or adding) the timer value of the timer.

For example, in Patent Literature 2, in a process of delaying execution of an effect using a subtraction timer, a delay time obtained by a lottery is set in a subtraction timer, and a time elapsed from the time of the lottery is measured, and the delay time is measured. When the elapsed time is measured (that is, when the set value of the subtraction timer becomes zero), a slot machine for executing an effect is disclosed.

However, Patent Documents 1 and 2 do not disclose a detailed management method of the timer value. Here, as is conventionally known, in order to update (subtract in this case) the timer value, an “address designation instruction” for directly instructing the register at which the timer value is stored (timer address) to the register is used. In this case, it is necessary to write an addressing instruction for each timer into the program, so that an increase in program capacity is expected.

On the other hand, in a slot machine, since a predetermined upper limit is set in a storage area of a ROM (Read Only Memory) mounted on a main control board, it is important to reduce a program capacity for main control. You. However, as described above, the slot machine disclosed in Patent Literature 2 has a problem that it is difficult to suppress an increase in the program capacity for main control related to timer interrupt processing when using a timer.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses an increase in a program capacity for main control in view of the above-described problem.

In order to solve such a problem, the present invention has a first storage area capable of storing a 1-byte value and a second storage area capable of storing a 2-byte value, wherein a first condition is satisfied. A one-byte timer having a first storage area, a first value stored in the first storage area, and a second value stored in the second storage area when a second condition is satisfied; Area and a 2-byte timer area having a second storage area, and at least a value stored in the first storage area and a value stored in the second storage area can be updated at a predetermined cycle. Do update process and can execute the update processing, first and special subtraction instruction is an instruction, and can execute the second special subtraction instruction is an instruction stored in the first storage area When updating the stored value, the first special subtraction instruction can be executed and the second special subtraction instruction can be executed. When updating the value stored in the storage area, the second special subtraction instruction can be executed, and the second special subtraction instruction can be executed without determining whether the value stored in the first storage area is “0”. and executable first special subtraction instruction, in the first storage area "N (where, N is the value of 1 or more)" in situations where is stored, the first special subtraction instruction is executed first memory the value is "N-1" and the area, in situations where "0" is stored in the first storage area, even when the first special subtraction instruction is executed, the value of the first memory area is "0" In a situation where “M (where M is a value of 1 or more)” is stored in the second storage area, the value of the second storage area becomes “M−1” when the second special subtraction instruction is executed. In a situation where “0” is stored in the second storage area, even if the second special subtraction instruction is executed, the value of the second storage area The gaming machine is provided, which becomes "0".

According to the present invention, an increase in the program capacity for main control can be suppressed .

FIG. 3 is an external perspective view of the slot machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 is an external front view of the slot machine according to the embodiment. It is a top view of a part of slot machine concerning this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an outline of control in the slot machine according to the embodiment. It is an external appearance perspective view of a game medal selector. It is a schematic diagram around a blocker arranged in a game medal selector. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an example of the arrangement of a display device and operation switches. It is a figure for explaining the example of specific use of a digit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of input ports 0 to 2; FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of output ports 3 to 6. FIG. 3 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 5) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and the contents thereof. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 6) illustrating storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and the contents thereof. It is a figure for explaining arrangement of the symbol of each reel. It is a figure for explaining display of a symbol at the time of reel stop. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining the combination of a design. It is a figure (the 3) for explaining the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (the 4) for explaining the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (the 5) for explaining the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (the 1) for explaining each role. It is a figure (the 2) for explaining each combination. It is a figure showing an example of the role lottery table used in the role lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a program start (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process (M_RANK_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows a power return process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows input port 0-2 reading (SS_IN_READ). It is a flowchart which shows an unrecoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). It is a flowchart which shows a main process (M_MAIN). It is a flow chart which shows a game start set (MS_GAME_SET). It is a flowchart which shows a game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows storage number reading (R_CREDIT_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC). It is a flowchart which shows waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flowchart which shows medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows a maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows a maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). It is a flow chart which shows one addition of stored number (MS_CREDIT_ADD). It is a flowchart which shows a game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET). It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY). It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY). It is a flowchart which shows 1 storage number subtraction (M_CREDIT_DEC). It is a flowchart which shows a storage bet process (MS_BET_IN). It is a flowchart which shows a start switch check (M_START_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows a start switch reception (M_START_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). It is a flowchart which shows a selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN). FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a timer storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st modification of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd modification of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT).

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described using a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example.

[1. Meaning of term]
First, the meaning of the terms used in this specification will be described.

(Bet, specified number, storage)
“Bet” means to bet a game medium (game medals, game balls, etc. (hereinafter, game medals, etc.)) in order to play a game. In a management gaming machine (sometimes referred to as an enclosed gaming machine, a medalless gaming machine, or the like), electronic information is meant as a game medium for performing a game. In this embodiment, a game medal is inserted from an insertion slot (corresponding to the game medal insertion slot 26 shown in FIG. 4), or a bet switch (bet switch 33 shown in FIG. 4) for betting a stored game medal. Is operated, a game medal is bet. Note that, for simplicity, "(the game medal) is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26" is described as "maintenance (short for insertion by hand)".

  The “specified number” refers to the number of game media (game medals and the like) that need to be bet in order to perform one game (obtain the result of one game). In the present embodiment, the specified number is set to “3”. Note that the specified number may be set to “1” or “2”, or a plurality of specified numbers such as “2” or “3”. Further, the prescribed number may be set to a different value for each gaming state (eg, non-bonus game = 3, bonus game = 2).

  “Storing” means storing (crediting) game media (game medals and the like). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the game media that can be stored is set to “50 (sheets)”.

  For example, in a situation where no game medals have been bet, when four game medals are serviced, three game medals (until the specified number is reached) are bet, and one game medal is remaining. Is stored. That is, when the game medals are maintained, there are cases where a bet is made and cases where a bet is stored. In addition, in a situation where 45 game medals are stored, when 9 game medals are paid out, 5 game medals (until the number reaches 50 (upper limit)) are stored, and the remaining 4 medals are stored. Is paid out from the payout port (corresponding to the payout port 53 shown in FIG. 2). That is, when the game medals are paid out, there are a case where the game medals are stored and a case where the game medals are paid out from the payout exit.

  Also, "acquiring a game medal (viewpoint on the player side)" and "paying out a game medal (viewpoint on the slot machine 10 side)" to the player are synonymous.

(RT)
“RT” means a lottery state of a winning combination (the details of the winning combination will be described later). Further, “RT shift” means shifting from one RT to another RT. That is, before and after the shift, even if the role to be selected in the role lottery is different, or if the role to be subjected to the lottery in the role lottery is the same, the winning probability of any of the roles is different.

  In the present embodiment, non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 are provided as RTs (details of each RT will be described later). Incidentally, “non-RT” in the present embodiment does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is synonymous with “RT0”.

  Among the above-mentioned RTs, non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 are RTs in a non-internal middle game (details will be described later), and RT4 is an RT in an internal middle game (details will be described later).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the RT also has one type of BB operation (at the time of RB operation). In addition, at the time of one type of BB operation (at the time of RB operation), it is RT in a special game (details will be described later). The “special game” is also called a “bonus game” or a “bonus game”.

(Display line)
The “display line” means a line on which a combination of symbols is displayed through a predetermined display window when a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are stopped. Details of the display line will be described later.

  “Effective line (abbreviated name of an activated display line)” means a display line that is a target of display determination (activated). Further, “invalid line (abbreviated name of an invalidated display line)” means a display line that is not a target of display determination (invalidated). For the sake of simplicity, "a symbol is displayed on an activated line" is described as "a symbol is displayed", and "a symbol combination is displayed on an activated line" is "a symbol combination is displayed. ". The “display determination” is to determine whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations. When displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is referred to as winning, the “display determination” may also be referred to as “winning determination”. In that case, the "effective line" may be also called a "winning line".

(Replay, winning, role, continuous action device)
“Re-game” means a game that can be played without betting game media (game medals and the like). In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the condition device related to the re-game is displayed, the same number of game medals as the number of game medals bet for performing the game this time are automatically bet. For the sake of simplicity, "the game medals of the same number as the number of the game medals bet for the current game are automatically bet" is described as "the game medals are automatically bet". .

  “Winning” means that a combination of symbols necessary for obtaining a game medium (game medal or the like) is displayed.

  The “ordinary character (SB)” is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning is activated, and when a specific symbol combination is displayed. , And ends the operation when one game is played (the result of one game is obtained).

  The "first-class special character (RB)" is a character that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning or increases the probability that the condition device related to winning is activated, and is activated when predetermined. However, it means that the operation can be continued until the game is performed not more than 12 times (the result of the game is not more than 12 times is obtained). In addition, the first-class special role (RB) is a special-purpose product when there is a predetermined number of prizes out of eight times during its operation, or when the first-class special role is received. When the operation of the continuous actuator ends, whichever is earlier, the operation ends.

  The “second-class special role (CB)” is a role that activates the condition device related to winning, regardless of the result of the role drawing, and is activated when predetermined, and one game is played. (When the result of one game is obtained), the operation is terminated.

  The “casing equipment continuous operation device (1 type BB, 2 types BB)” is a device capable of continuously operating the first special specialty or the second special specialty, and displays a specific symbol combination. It means that it operates when it is performed and ends its operation when it is determined in advance.

(Conditioning equipment, role)
A "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for displaying the winning, replay, combination of symbols related to the operation of the accessory, or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and winning the role lottery. It means something that works when done.

  That is, the condition devices are roughly classified into a condition device related to winning, a condition device related to replay, and a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device for accessory.

  The condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device for the accessory includes a condition device (SB) related to the operation of the ordinary accessory (SB), and a condition device (RB) related to the operation of the special type 1 (RB). ), Conditioning device (CB) related to the operation of the second class special role (CB), Conditioning device (1 class BB) related to the operation of the continuous operation device for the special type related to the first class special role, Second class special There is a condition device (two types of BB) related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the accessory.

  In the present embodiment, 23 condition devices related to winning (winning 01 to winning 23) are provided as condition devices related to winning. Further, as condition devices related to re-games, there are 11 condition devices related to re-games (re-game 01 to re-game 11). Further, as a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device of the accessory, there is a condition device (one type BB) related to the operation of one accessory or the continuous operation device of the accessory.

  The “role” refers to a target of a lottery of a role lottery. In the present embodiment, one role corresponds to one or more condition devices. That is, when one of the winning combinations is won, one or more condition devices corresponding to the winning combinations (winning combinations) are activated.

  The winning combination is a “winning combination” in which the condition device related to winning is activated, a “re-gaming combination” in which the condition device related to replay is activated, and the condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device for accessory. They are roughly divided into "special roles".

  "Special role" is also called "bonus". Because, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is displayed, the accessory or the consecutive item actuation device is activated, and during the operation, a game medium (game medal or the like) is obtained (a special advantage is obtained). Because you can expect.

  The bonus includes a single bonus (SB) corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the ordinary accessory (SB), and a regular bonus (corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB)). RB), the challenge bonus (CB) corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the second kind special character (CB), and the condition device related to the operation of the continuous function device for the first kind special character. There is a type 1 big bonus (1 type BB) and a type 2 big bonus (2 types BB) corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device related to the type 2 special special item. In the present embodiment, one bonus (one type BB) is provided as a bonus. As a bonus, two or more types BB may be provided, or other bonuses (SB, RB, CB, or two types BB) may be provided.

  Regarding SB or CB, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the bonus ends even if the symbol combination corresponding to the won bonus is not displayed in the current game. That is, the winning information of these bonuses is not carried over to the next game. On the other hand, in the RB, the first type BB, and the two type BB, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the bonus continues until the symbol combination corresponding to the winning bonus is displayed. That is, the winning information of these bonuses may be carried over to the next game. Generally, a game when the operation of the condition device corresponding to the bonus is continued is referred to as an "internal game (abbreviation of a game in which the bonus is internally won)", and a condition corresponding to the bonus. The game when the device is not operating is called "non-internal medium game (abbreviation of game when bonus is not won internally)". In the present embodiment, the game when the condition device corresponding to the type BB is activated (when the type BB is won) is included in the “non-internal medium game”. However, the game when the condition device corresponding to one type BB is activated may be included in the “internal game”.

  The operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus is displayed will be described with reference to one type of BB as an example. The first class BB (a continuous actuating device for the first class special character) is activated when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning one type BB is displayed, and continues to operate until the end condition is satisfied. For example, the end condition may be a time when a game medal exceeding a predetermined number 1 is obtained from a number not exceeding 285. Note that the termination condition is that a predetermined number of RB operations have been performed (however, when the last RB operation has been completed) or a predetermined number of games have been played ( (The result of one game is obtained). In addition, as for the RB (first-class special accessory) when the first-class BB (the first-class special accessory relating to the first-class special accessory) is operated, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning RB is displayed. May be activated, or may be activated unconditionally. The type 1 BB (a continuous actuating device according to the type 1 special accessory) in the present embodiment is activated when a combination of symbols corresponding to the elected type 1 BB is displayed, and the game medal exceeding 285 sheets The operation is terminated when is obtained. In addition, while the type 1 BB is operating, the RB (the 1st type special accessory) is operated unconditionally, and the operation is terminated when there are two winnings or two games, and the type 1 special role is stopped. If the BB termination condition is not satisfied, the RB operates again.

  The “winning part” is also called “small part”. This is because when a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination is displayed, a game medium (eg, a game medal) is paid out. In other words, it is possible to obtain a small profit of obtaining a game medium (game medal or the like). In the present embodiment, 24 small roles (winning A1 to winning A6, winning B1 to winning B3, winning C, winning D, winning E, winning F, winning G, winning H, winning I, winning J, Win K, Win L, Win M, Win N, Win O, Win P, Win Q).

  In the small win, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the small win ends even if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning small win is not displayed in the current game. That is, the winning information of the small role is not carried over to the next game.

  “Replaying role” is also referred to as “replay”. This is because a game medal is automatically bet when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is displayed, and a replay can be performed (replay). In the present embodiment, 15 replays (replay A1 to replay A6, replay B1 to replay B3, replay C, replay D, replay E, replay F, replay G, replay as replays) H).

  In the replay, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the replay is ended even if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the won replay is not displayed in the current game. That is, the replay winning information is not carried over to the next game.

  In the present embodiment, as a part of the small win, there is a small win (push order bell (winning A group, winning B group)) in which the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Further, as a part of the replay, there is a replay (push order replay (re-game A group, re-game B group)) in which the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Although the details will be described later, the winning prize A group is a generic term for the prize A1 to the prize A6, the prize B group is a generic term for the prize B1 to the prize B3, and the replay A group is a generic term for the replay A1 to the replay A6. The re-game B group is a general term for re-game B1 to re-game B3.

  Here, the “operation mode of the stop switch 35” is a general concept indicating a pressing order (a pressing order) of the stop switch 35 and a timing of pressing the stop switch 35.

  The "advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35" means an operation mode for obtaining an advantageous game result when the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Specifically, an operation mode for displaying a symbol combination with a larger number of game media (game medals, etc.) that can be obtained, and a symbol combination that is an advantageous RT transition condition are described. This means an operation mode for displaying, or an operation mode for not displaying a combination of symbols which is a disadvantageous transition condition to RT.

  The “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as “correct operation mode of the stop switch 35”. Therefore, for example, when “the operation mode of the stop switch 35” indicates the pressing order of the stop switch 35, “the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as “the correct pressing order of the stop switch 35”.

  The "unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35" means an operation mode for obtaining an unfavorable game result when the game result obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. Specifically, the operation mode for displaying the symbol combination with the smaller number of game media (game medals, etc.) that can be acquired and the symbol combination that is an advantageous RT transition condition are displayed. This means an operation mode for not displaying the image or an operation mode for displaying a combination of symbols that is a disadvantageous condition for shifting to RT.

  The “unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as the “incorrect operation mode of the stop switch 35”. Therefore, for example, when the “operation mode of the stop switch 35” indicates the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed, the “unfavorable operation mode of the stop switch 35” is also referred to as the “incorrectly pressing order of the stop switch 35”. .

  The “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” in the present embodiment refers to a game that has been won in the pressing order bell (winning A group, winning B group) or a pressing order replay (replaying game A group, (Game B group).

  In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 35 is operated in an incorrectly depressed order in a game in which the push order bell (winning A group) is won, any condition that is activated depends on the timing at which the stop switch is operated. The combination of symbols corresponding to the device may not be displayed. In this manner, the fact that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed is also referred to as “(missing) (missing (of role) occurred)”. Then, in the present embodiment, in a game in which the pushing order bell (winning A group) is won, when the pushing order bell (winning A group) is missed, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed. .

  In the present embodiment, in the game in which the pressing order bell (winning B group) is won, no drop-out occurs regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35. That is, a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the operating condition devices is always displayed. It should be noted that, even in a game in which the pressing order bell (winning B group) is won, if the stop switch 35 is operated in the incorrect pressing order, the game may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, in the game that has been won in the pressing order replay (the replaying game A group and the replaying game B group), no dropout occurs regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35. That is, a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the operating condition devices is always displayed.

(Instruction function)
The “instruction function” is a function of instructing (notifying) the “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” described above. The "instruction function" is a function operated by a main control board (corresponding to the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 4) for controlling a game, and is, for example, a predetermined display device electrically connected to the main control board 60. Next, information which can specify an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35 is displayed (notified).

  The “instruction function” can be interpreted in a broad sense and a narrow sense as described below. In the present embodiment, an annotation is given to the “instruction function” in a broad sense or a narrow sense as necessary.

  The “instruction function” in a broad sense is a function of instructing the “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” in a small win or a replay-winning game in which the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is different. In other words, the "instruction function" in a broad sense refers to a game that has been won in the pushing order bell (winning A group, winning B group) or a game that has been won in pushing order replay (replay A group, replay B group). This is a function for instructing the "correct push sequence of the stop switch 35".

  The “instruction function” in a narrow sense is a function of instructing the “advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35” in a game in which the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 has been won as a small role. That is, the "instruction function" in a narrow sense is a function of instructing the "correct push order of the stop switch 35" in a game that has been won in the push order bell (winning A group, winning B group).

  The “instruction function” is also a function for notifying “an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 35”. That is, the “instruction function” is also a “notification function”.

  “Instruction function operation game” means a game in which the instruction function is operated. That is, the instruction function operation game is a single game. Even if the result of the game obtained by the operation mode of the stop switch 35 is a game that has been won for a different small role or replay, if the instruction function is not activated, the game is not an instruction function operation game.

(Other)
“Setting difference” means a difference between settings. That is, the “role having no setting difference in the winning probability” means that the winning probability is the same in all the settings. The “role having a setting difference in the winning probability” means a role having a winning probability different between at least two settings.

  The “setting” means a combination of probabilities that the respective condition devices related to the operation of the winning, the replay, the accessory, or the operation of the accessory continuous operating device are activated. In the present embodiment, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate is designed. Specifically, out of the six settings from setting 1 to setting 6, the payout rate at setting 6 is the highest. Note that the lower the setting, the higher the payout rate may be designed.

  The term “payout rate” means a value calculated by “the number of game media (game medals and the like) to be paid out / the number of game media (game medals and the like) to be bet”. When the payout rate is “1”, it means that the number of game media (game medals and the like) has not increased or decreased. When the payout ratio exceeds “1”, it means that the number of game media (game medals and the like) is increasing. When the payout ratio is less than “1”, it means that the number of game media (game medals and the like) has decreased.

  “PB = 1” means that a desired symbol can be displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. In the present embodiment, the symbol can be displayed (pulled in) from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated to the symbol four points ahead. For example, referring to FIG. 17, which will be described later, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" of the left reel 39a is positioned on the active line (upper left), four points ahead of the left stop switch 35a Up to the bell symbol of symbol number "5" are symbols that can be displayed on the active line (upper left).

  Further referring to FIG. 17, the symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of symbol number "1" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of symbol number "6". The symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of symbol number "6" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of symbol number "11". Furthermore, the symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of symbol number "11" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of symbol number "16". The symbol five symbols ahead of the replay symbol of symbol number "16" on the left reel 39a is the replay symbol of symbol number "1". That is, the replay symbol of the left reel 39a is a symbol that can be displayed on the active line (upper left) regardless of the timing at which the left stop switch 35a is operated. That is, the replay symbol of the left reel 39a is "PB = 1". When the symbol combination is “PB = 1”, it means that all symbols constituting the symbol combination are “PB = 1”.

  “PB ≠ 1” means that a desired symbol cannot be displayed on the activated line depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. When the combination of symbols is “PB ≠ 1”, it means that at least one of the symbols constituting the combination of symbols is “PB ≠ 1”.

  (N is an integer of 2 or more) (N is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is "N" game item. , The game of the “N” th game is referred to as “this game”. The game of the “N−1” game is referred to as “the previous game”, and the game of the “N + 1” game is referred to as the “next game”.

  The “difference number” means a value calculated by “the number of paid out game medals−the number of betted game medals”.

  In the present specification, when "(B)" is added to the end of a numerical value (particularly, the end of 8-bit data), it means that the numerical value is a binary number. Similarly, when "(D)" is added to the end of a numerical value, it means that the numerical value is a decimal number. Similarly, when "(H)" is added to the end of a numerical value, it means that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number. Specifically, the decimal number “16” is described as “00010000 (B)” in binary number, described as “16 (D)” in decimal number, and described as “10 (H)” in hexadecimal number. I do. However, when it is obvious whether the number is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, “(B)”, “(D)”, and “(H)” are omitted.

  In the binary notation other than the 8-bit numerical value, “(B)” at the end is omitted. For example, “0” in notation such as “the value of the A register is“ 0 ”” actually means a binary number of “00000000 (B)”, but this is omitted and “0” is omitted. It may be.

  Also, the value of the 2-byte register may be represented in hexadecimal. For example, the “HL register” is a combination of a 1-byte H register and a 1-byte L register, and is a register (sometimes called a pair register) capable of storing information of 2 bytes in total. , "HL register value is" F02A (H) "". At this time, as for the values of the individual registers, for example, when the H register stores the upper bits and the L register stores the lower bits, the value of the H register is “F0 (H)”, that is, “11110000 (B)”. Thus, the value of the L register becomes “2A (H)”, that is, “00101010 (B)”.

  Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[2. Schematic configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine according to the embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a base 1 and a front door (a front cover or a front door) that opens / closes the front (front) of the base 1 with the opening / closing axis as a support axis. 2). Although not shown in FIG. 1, when the front door 2 is opened, the opening is detected by a door switch 15 described later.

  Inside the base 1, a power supply unit including the power switch 11, a game medal payout device 49 including the hopper 50, a symbol display device 38 including three reels 39, and the like are housed. The game medal payout device 49 can pay out game medals from the payout port 53 (see FIG. 2).

  Further, a board case 16 for housing the main control board 60 therein is attached to the back surface on the inner side of the base 1. When the front door 2 is opened, the board case 16 and the main control board 60 allow the state of the caulked portion of the board case 16 to be easily visually confirmed, so that the comparison is performed above the symbol display device 38. It is installed in a position that is easy to see.

  The swaged portion of the board case 16 is a sealing member that seals the board case 16, and the board case 16 is configured so that it cannot be opened unless the swaged portion is broken. The main control board 60 is housed in the transparent board case 16 sealed by the caulking portion, so that the main control board 60 cannot be accessed unless the caulking portion is destroyed, and high security is ensured. . In addition, a seal (a seal that records an opening record of the swaged portion) for proving that the main control board accommodated therein is the proper main control board 60 is attached to the surface of the board case 16. . A set value display LED 66 (digit 5 described later) for displaying a set value is mounted on the main control board 60.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, on the back side of the front door 2, a transparent control housing 80 is provided above the display window 17 (near the back side of the image display device 21 shown in FIG. 2). The board case is attached. The sub control board 80 is electrically connected to the main control board 60 by a harness or an optical fiber (neither is shown).

  Although not explicitly shown in FIG. 1, when the front door 2 is opened, a start switch 34 provided in front of the front door 2 via the display window 17 from the back of the front door 2. Is visible. With such a configuration, when the hall clerk attempts to operate the start switch 34 during a setting change described later, even when the front door 2 is open, the hall clerk can be operated from the back of the front door 2. Through the display window 17, the position of the start switch 34 provided in front of the front door 2 can be confirmed, and the operation of the start switch 34 during setting change can be performed smoothly. In other words, the part in front of the front door 2 can be checked from behind the front door 2, so that the parts in front of the front door 2 can be checked even when the front door 2 is open. Operation becomes easy.

  FIG. 2 is a front external view of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is an external view of the slot machine 10 illustrated in FIG. 1 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 2, near the front center of the slot machine 10, a display window 17 is provided so that a part of the reel 39 (design) can be visually recognized. Above the display window 17, an image display device 21 for performing an effect or the like (displaying an image) is provided. A start switch 34 and a stop switch 35 (left stop switch 35a, middle stop switch 35b, right stop switch 35c) are provided below the display window 17. Further, various operation switches and the like operated by the player are provided in portions protruding from above the start switch 34 and the stop switch 35 and from below the display window 17.

  FIG. 3 is a top view of a part of the slot machine according to the embodiment. FIG. 3 shows a portion of the slot machine 10 where various operation switches and the like are provided when viewed from above.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in order from the left side in the figure, the display device (the stored number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, the status display LED 48), a part of the operation switches (1 bet switch 33a, 3 bet switch 33b, adjustment switch) 36), a cross key (also referred to as a “cursor key”) 22, a menu button 23, an effect button 24, and a game medal slot 26.

  The arrangement of each configuration shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 is merely an example of the arrangement in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and does not necessarily need to be arranged at the illustrated position, and may be changed to an arbitrary position. May be. Specifically, for example, the display device may be arranged on the left side of the display window 17. Also, not all of the configurations shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 need be arranged. Specifically, for example, if the effect button 24 also serves the function of the menu button 23, the menu button 23 need not be arranged. As described above, when the number of components is reduced by sharing functions, not only the effect of suppressing the manufacturing cost of parts can be expected, but also the erroneous operation by the player can be prevented by providing an interval between the operation switches. The effect can be expected.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an outline of control in the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 shows a representative example of a configuration required for performing each control in the slot machine 10, and each of these configurations will be described in detail. In FIG. 4, solid arrows connecting the components indicate the input and output directions of signals and the like.

[2-1. Main control board]
First, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as a representative control board, a main control board for controlling a game (also referred to as a “main control board”, a “main control means”, or a “main control means”). 60, and a sub-control board (also referred to as “sub-control board”, “sub-control means”, “sub-control means”) 80 for controlling effects and the like.

  The main control board 60 includes an input port 61, an output port 62, an RWM (Read Write Memory) 63, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 64, and a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 65. FIG. 4 is merely an example, and the configuration of the main control board 60 is not limited to this.

  The input port 61 is a connection portion to which signals from the peripheral device for game (for example, various operation switches such as the bet switch 33) to the main CPU 65 are input. Generally, the input port 61 is composed of a plurality of ports. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are three ports of “input port — 0”, input port — 1, and input port — 2. In the following description, for simplicity, the above input ports are described as “input port 0”, “input port 1”, and “input port 2” in order. Such notation is similarly applied to the output port 62 described below.

  The output port 62 is a connection unit from which a signal from the main CPU 65 to a peripheral device for a game (for example, the motor 40 or the like) is output. That is, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) and these peripheral devices for games are electrically connected via the input port 61 and the output port 62. Like the input port 61, the output port 62 is generally composed of a plurality of ports. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the output port 62 has nine ports of “output port 0” to “output port 8”.

  Note that the number of input ports 61 and the number of output ports 62 are merely examples, and are not limited to the above examples.

  Specific signals handled by the input port 61 and the output port 62 will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  The RWM 63 is a storage device (also referred to as a “storage unit”) from which data can be read and written, and various data (for example, a timer value) necessary for the main CPU 65 (main control board 60) to control a game. ) Is stored. The RWM 63 is also called a main memory.

  The ROM 64 is a read-only storage device (also referred to as a “storage unit”), and includes programs and various data (for example, a data table) necessary for the main CPU 65 (main control board 60) to control a game. Is stored.

  The main CPU 65 refers to a CPU mounted on the main control board 60, and controls a game according to a program stored in the ROM 64 (for example, a lottery or the like). The main CPU 65 has a plurality of registers such as an A register to an L register (also referred to as a general-purpose register) and a data transmission register (also referred to as a built-in register).

  On the main control board 60 of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) including an RWM 63, a ROM 64, and a main CPU 65 is mounted. The RWM 63 and the ROM 64 may be mounted outside the MPU (however, on the main control board 60). Similarly, an MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub-control board 80 described later, but the RWM 83 and the ROM 84 are provided outside the MPU (however, on the sub-control board 80). ) May also be mounted.

  In the main control board 60, the game is controlled by the operation of the main CPU 65 (which may be regarded as an MPU), and each unit of the main control board 60 described later (for example, the role lottery unit 69) is realized. Details of these means will be described later.

[2-2. Game medal selector]
Next, the game medal selector 27 among the peripheral devices for the game will be described. The game medal slot 26 shown in FIG. 4 is a slot for accepting the maintenance of game medals. The maintained game medals are sent to the inside of the game medal selector 27.

  Here, FIGS. 5 and 6 illustrate the detailed structure of the game medal selector. FIG. 5 is an external perspective view of the game medal selector, and FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram around a blocker arranged in the game medal selector.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 6, the game medal selector 27 includes a passage sensor 28, a blocker 29, and a loading sensor 30 (individually, for example, loading sensors 30a and 30b), and a main control board 60. Is electrically connected to In FIG. 4, a broken line with an arrow near the game medal selector 27 indicates a flow of processing when the game medal is cared for.

  The game medals maintained from the game medal slot 26 are guided by a series of passages (game medal passages) formed inside the slot machine 10 and pass through the game medal selector 27. Then, the game medals flowing down the game medal passage are finally sent to the hopper 50 or returned from the payout port 53. This will be described in detail below.

  The maintained game medals are guided from the entrance 27a (see FIG. 5) to the inside of the game medal selector 27, and are first detected by a passage sensor (sometimes called a selector passage sensor). Here, in the slot machine 10, two types of game medal passages are prepared as passages of the inserted game medals (game medal passages) depending on whether or not acceptance of the game medals is permitted (permission / non-permission). I have. Permission / non-permission is distributed by a blocker 29 provided downstream of the passage sensor 28 (see FIG. 6).

  As shown in FIG. 6, the blocker 29 is provided so as to be displaceable between a permitted position (ON state) and a non-permitted position (OFF state) in accordance with a permission state / non-permission state regarding accepting a game medal. Accordingly, a function of sorting permission / non-permission of accepting the inserted game medals is provided.

  When the blocker 29 is in a state of permitting the acceptance of game medals (permitted position), the inserted game medals are guided to the permitted game medal passage. At this time, the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 flow down the permitted game medal passage, and are inserted into the insertion sensor 30 (for example, a plurality of optical sensors, After being detected by the insertion sensors 30a and 30b), the game medal is sent out of the game medal selector 27 from the exit 27b and sent to the hopper 50.

  The insertion sensor 30 is, for example, an optical sensor, and a plurality of insertion sensors may be provided along the game medal path. In the present embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that two input sensors 30 are disposed by an input sensor 30a disposed on the upstream side and an input sensor 30b disposed on the downstream side. In the following description, the upstream input sensor 30a may be referred to as “input sensor 1” and the downstream input sensor 30b may be referred to as “input sensor 2”.

  On the other hand, when the blocker 29 is in a state in which the acceptance of game medals is not permitted (non-permission position), the inserted game medals are guided to the game medal passage in the non-permission state. At this time, the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 flow down the game medal passage in the non-permitted state, and are sent from the exit 27c to the outside of the game medal selector 27 without being detected by the insertion sensor 30, It is returned from the payout port 53.

  Supplementary control of permission / non-permission by the blocker 29 will be described. In the slot machine 10, during the game (from the rotation of the reels 39 to the stop of the rotation of all the reels 39 (when paying out the game medals, until the payout of the game medals is completed)), the blocker 29 plays the game medals. Do not allow acceptance (rejected). That is, the blocker 29 permits acceptance of the game medal (permitted) when at least the game is not performed.

[2-3. Operation switch]
Next, the operation switch 32 among the peripheral devices for gaming will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, on the main control board 60, as operation switches 32 operated by the player, a bet switch 33 (1 bet switch 33a, 3 bet switch 33b), a start switch 34, a stop switch 35 (left stop switch) 35a, a middle stop switch 35b, a right stop switch 35c), and a settlement switch 36 are electrically connected.

  The bet switch 33 is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored game medals. In the present embodiment, the bet switch 33 includes a 1-bet switch 33a for betting one game medal and a 3-bet switch (MAX bet switch) 40b for betting three (specified number, maximum number) game medals. Have. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, a two-bet switch for betting two game medals may be provided, or any one bet switch may be provided.

  By operating the 1-bet switch 33a a plurality of times, a plurality of game medals can be bet. Specifically, the player can bet two game medals by operating the one-bet switch 33a twice, and betting three game medals by operating the one-bet switch 33a three times. Can be. In addition, when one or more (but less than three) game medals are bet (pressed) when one or more game medals are bet, the three-bet switch 33b subtracts the number already bet from three. A number of game medals can be bet. Specifically, for example, when one game medal is bet and the 3-bet switch 33b is operated, two game medals are bet.

  The start switch 34 is a switch operated by the player when rotating the reel 39 (the left reel 39a, the center reel 39b, and the right reel 39c). In other words, the switch is operated by the player when starting the game.

  The stop switch 35 is a switch operated by the player when stopping the rotation of the reel 39. In the present embodiment, three stop switches 35 (a left stop switch 35a, a middle stop switch 35b, and a right stop switch 35c) are provided as the stop switches 35. The three stop switches 35 correspond one-to-one to the three reels 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c). For example, the left stop switch 35a is a switch operated when stopping the rotation of the left reel 39a.

  In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player stops the rotation of the three reels 39 (although the stop switch 35 should be operated in the order instructed when the instruction function is activated). To do so, the corresponding three stop switches 35 can be operated in any order. At this time, the stop switch 35 operated first is referred to as a “first stop switch 35”, and similarly, the stop switch 35 operated second is a “second stop switch 35” and operated third. The stop switch 35 is referred to as a “third stop switch 35”.

  The settlement switch 36 is a switch operated by the player when paying out the game medals bet and / or adjusting the stored game medals.

[2-4. Display device for game medals, digit]
Next, a display device among the peripheral devices for gaming will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display board 44 of the display device 43 such as a game medal is electrically connected to the main control board 60. Although not shown, a relay board is actually provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 44, and the main control board 60 and the relay board are connected. The display substrate 44 is connected. The main control board 60 and the display board 44 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed therebetween. This can be applied to other control boards and the like illustrated in FIG. 4. Specifically, for example, one or more other boards (such as a relay board) are provided between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80. An intervening configuration may be used.

  On the display board 44, a stored number display LED 45, an acquired number display LED 47, and a state display LED 48 are mounted. Each of these LEDs is provided at a position near the operation switch operated by the player and always visible from the player. Each of these LEDs does not need to be all mounted on one display substrate 44. For example, each LED includes a plurality of display substrates 44 such as display substrates 44A, 44B,. The LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, and the status display LED 48) may be separately mounted on the plurality of display boards 44.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of the arrangement of the display device and the operation switches. FIG. 7 is an enlarged image view of a part of the front of the slot machine 10, showing the arrangement of the stored number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, the status display LED 48, the settlement switch 36, the 1-bet switch 33a, and the 3-bet switch 33b. An example is shown. In addition, the display substrate 44 indicated by a broken line in FIG. 7 is disposed behind the stored number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, and the status display LED 48 (that is, inside the slot machine 10). Each configuration will be described in detail with reference to the arrangement example of FIG.

  The stored number display LED 45 is a display device for displaying the number of stored game medals, and includes a digit 1 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying a lower digit. That is, the stored number display LED 45 shown in FIG. 7 can display the number of stored game medals in two digits.

  “Digit” means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, one digit is seven segments A to G (seven bar-shaped LEDs for displaying alphanumeric characters) and segment DP (digital point). It is composed of one dot-shaped LED that indicates a decimal point. In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the number of digits mounted on the display board 44 is four, that is, digits 1 to 4. However, the main control board 60 can have a plurality of other digits. (For example, setting value display LED 66 and management information display LED 67). In the present embodiment, another digit 5 is mounted on the main control board 60, and this digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 66.

  The stored number display LED 45 displays the number of stored game medals (reserved medals), and specifically displays two-digit numbers from “00” to “50” (integer). For example, when no game medals are bet and no game medals are stored, the display of the stored number display LED 45 is “00”. In this state, when one game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26, one game medal is bet. Furthermore, when two game medals are inserted, three game medals are bet if the prescribed number is three. Therefore, if up to three game medals have been inserted, no game medals are stored. However, when the number of inserted game medals exceeds three, the excess game medals are stored and the stored number is displayed by the stored number display LED 45.

  In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, up to 50 game medals can be stored. Therefore, when the stored number is 50 (when the stored number display LED 45 indicates “50”), even if a game medal is inserted from the game medal slot 26, the game medal is not stored. Specifically, when the number of stored cards is 50, the blocker 29 is in the non-permitted state (at the non-permitted position), so that the inserted game medals pass through the non-permitted game medal passage and are paid out. Returned from 53.

  Also, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to the condition device related to winning is displayed, and when a game medal is paid out, the game medal is actually paid out from the payout port 53, Priority is given to addition (payout) as the number of stored game medals. For example, when the stored number is "10" (when the stored number display LED 45 indicates "10") and nine game medals are paid out, the stored number becomes "19" and The stored number display LED 45 indicates “19”.

  However, when the number of stored game medals exceeds “50” by being added as the number of stored game medals, the excess game medals are actually paid out from the payout port 53. For example, when the number of stored game medals is “47” (when the stored number display LED 45 indicates “47”) and nine game medals are paid out, the number of stored game medals is 3 The number of sheets is added, the stored number becomes “50”, and the stored number display LED 45 displays “50”. Then, the remaining six game medals are paid out from the payout port 53.

  Further, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the condition device related to the replay is displayed, a game medal is automatically bet. For example, when three game medals are bet in the game, three game medals are automatically bet. By the way, since a bet is made to make a re-game, even if the settlement switch 36 is operated after the bet is made (before the start switch 34 for making the re-game is operated), it is automatically set. The game medals bet will not be refunded.

  The acquired number display LED 47 is a display device for displaying the number of acquired (paid out) game medals, and includes a digit 3 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying a lower digit. That is, the acquired number display LED 47 shown in FIG. 7 can display the acquired number of game medals in two digits, similarly to the stored number display LED 45.

  The acquired number display LED 47 displays, for example, “00” when no game medal is acquired (not paid out), but when one game medal is acquired (paid out), one game medal is displayed. Every time a medal is paid out, it is displayed in order from "00" (finally, "09" is displayed). Thereby, when the game medals in the hopper 50 become empty while the nine game medals are being paid out, an accurate payout state can be displayed.

  It should be noted that the acquired number display LED 47 does not need to display anything when no game medal is acquired (is not paid out), or may display “0” only in the digit 4 of the lower digit. .

  Further, when an error is detected, the acquired number display LED 47 functions as an error information display LED that displays information (error information) indicating the detected error. For example, when the front door 2 of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, error information “dE” indicating a door open error is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. During the setting change described later, the error information “dE” indicating the door open error is not displayed even when the front door 2 is open. However, after the setting change is completed, error information “dE” indicating a door open error may be displayed.

  Furthermore, when operating the instruction function, the acquired number display LED 47 also functions as an instruction information display LED that displays information (push order instruction information) for instructing an advantageous operation mode (correct answer order). Therefore, the acquired number display LED 47 is a display device having a function as an acquired number display LED, a function as an error information display LED, and a function as an instruction information display LED.

  Here, as an example of a display method in the case of switching from the display of the pressing order instruction information (“= 1” in the following example) to the display of the number of paid out game medals, the display is reset once before switching. Therefore, another display may be performed. Specifically, for example, when “00” is displayed for reset and finally the payout of nine game medals is displayed, “= 1” → “00” → “01” → “02” →. → "09" is obtained. Further, for example, when the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off for resetting, "= 1" → "**" → "01" → "02" → ... "09". Note that "*" indicating the display content of the digit (LED) means turning off (not displaying), and when both digits are turned off, it is expressed as "**".

  Further, the image display device 21 connected to the sub-control board 80 described later also functions as a notifying device for notifying an advantageous operation mode (correct answering order) when the main control board 60 activates the instruction function. .

  In the following specification, the display of the pressing order using the acquired number display LED 47 by the main control board 60 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the pressing order by the sub-control board 80 is referred to as “notification of the pressing order”. Name. The number corresponding to the advantageous pressing order is referred to as “push order instruction number”, and the display content of the pressing order displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the “operation of the instruction function” is referred to as “push order instruction information”. That is, by the operation of the instruction function, the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47.

  The status display LED 48 is a display device that displays the status of the game in the slot machine 10 and the like. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, seven LEDs (individually, the status display LEDs 48a to 48g) are used. It is configured. The role of each LED will be described.

  The status display LED 48a is an LED (replay display LED) that is turned on when a replay wins. The status display LED 48a is lit when an automatic bet based on a replay winning is made, thereby notifying the player of the automatic bet state.

  The status display LED 48b is an LED that lights up in a state where a game medal can be inserted (insertion possible display LED). After the game is over, the state display LED 48b lights up before a game medal is inserted for shifting to the next game, thereby indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In this embodiment, even after the replay is activated, the status display LED 48b is turned on when betting is possible in accordance with the stored number.

  The status display LED 48c is an LED (payment display LED) that lights up during the payment process. More specifically, the status display LED 48c actually pays out game medals when the settlement switch 36 is turned on in a state where the player has stored medals and / or bet medals (excluding an automatic bet at the time of replay winning). Lights up in the middle.

  The state display LED 48d is an LED (game start LED) that is turned on when a game medal is inserted and the start switch 34 can be operated. Therefore, the state display LED 48d does not light up in a state where the game medals have not been bet to the specified number (or an automatic bet has not been made at the time of the replay winning).

  The status display LEDs 48e to 48g are LEDs (insertion display LEDs) each displaying the number of game medals bet. Specifically, when one game medal is bet, the status display LED 48e (single insertion indicator LED) is turned on. When two game medals are bet, the status display LED 48e (single insertion display LED) and the status display LED 48f (two insertion display LED) light up. When three game medals are bet, in addition to the status display LED 48e (single-insert display LED) and the status display LED 48f (two-insert display LED), the status display LED 48g (three-insert display LED) is turned on. .

  The set value display LED 66 is a display device that displays the current set value when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed, and includes a digit 5. Note that the stored number display LED 45 or the acquired number display LED 47 may also have a function as a set value display LED.

  The management information display LED 67 is a display device that displays predetermined management information, and includes, for example, four digits. In order to ensure the visibility of each digit, for example, it is preferable that each digit is designed to have a size satisfying “width m1 × length n ≧ 36 square millimeters”. Alternatively, it is preferable that the four digits arranged in one horizontal line are designed to have a size satisfying “width m2 × height n × 4 (number of digits) ≧ 36 square millimeters”.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the use of a digit. First, FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a detailed configuration of digits 1 to 5. As shown in FIG. 8A, a digit is a segment LED composed of seven rod-shaped segments A to G and one dot-shaped segment DP.

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the use of the segments A to G and the segment DP in each of the digits 1 to 5.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the segments A to G of digit 1 are used as upper digits of the stored number display LED 45. The segments A to G of digit 2 are used as lower digits of the stored number display LED 45. The segments A to G of the digit 3 are used as upper digits of the acquired number display LED 47. The segments A to G of the digit 4 are used as lower digits of the acquired number display LED 47. Note that the segments DP of the digits 1 to 4 are unused.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, segments A to G of digit 5 are used as set value display LEDs 66. In addition, the segment DP of the digit 5 is used as an LED that is turned on during setting change. That is, among the set value display LEDs 66 (digit 5), when only the segments A to G are lit, it means that the setting is being confirmed, and when the segments A to G and the segment DP are lit, the setting is being changed. means. Note that the segment DP of the digit 5 may be used as an LED that is turned on when a set value is determined during setting change.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram for describing segment data. As shown in FIG. 8C, the segment data for designating the display content of each digit is 1-byte (8-bit) data. Each bit of the segment data is described in a binary number, "0" means light-off, and "1" means light-on.

  For example, to display “0” on digit 1, it is necessary to turn on segments A to F of digit 1 and turn off segments G and segment DP. That is, the segment data in this case is “00111111 (B)”.

[2-5. Symbol display device, game medal payout device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the motor 40 of the symbol display device 38 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The symbol display device 38 includes three reels 39 (a left reel 39a, a middle reel 39b, and a right reel 39c), a motor 40 for driving each reel 39, and a reel sensor 41 for detecting the position of the reel 39. It is comprised including.

  The reel 39 has a ring shape, and has a reel tape on which an outer peripheral surface is printed with a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to roles). The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 39 will be described later.

  Further, each reel 39 is provided with one index (may be two or more). The index is provided, for example, in a convex shape on the peripheral side surface of the reel 39, and is used when detecting whether the reel 39 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one revolution, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 41, and the signal of the reel sensor 41 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the reel sensor 41 detects the index (the index turns off the reel sensor 41), the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 39 has passed a predetermined position.

  The symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 41 detects the index of the reel 39 is stored in the ROM 64 in advance. Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a game medal payout device 49 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The game medal payout device 49 includes a hopper 50 for storing game medals, a hopper motor 51 that is driven when paying out game medals stored in the hopper 50, and a payout by driving the hopper motor 51. And a payout sensor 52 for detecting the played game medals.

  As described above, a game medal inserted (accepted) from the game medal insertion slot 26 is sent to a predetermined game medal passage and sent to the hopper 50.

  The payout sensors 52 (payout sensors 52a and 52b) are one set (two) of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined interval. According to the payout sensor 52, the paid out game medals are detected by one payout sensor 52 (for example, the payout sensor 52a), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the other payout sensor 52 (for example, This is detected by the payout sensor 52b). Then, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a game medal has been correctly paid out based on a signal from each payout sensor 52.

  For example, when the signals from any of the payout sensors 52 are off even though the hopper motor 51 is driven, the main control board 60 determines that the hopper 50 has become empty (a game medal has not been correctly detected). Is not paid out). Further, for example, when the signal from at least one of the payout sensors 52 remains on, the main control board 60 determines that the game medals are packed (the game medals are not correctly paid out).

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 10 can include a sub-tank for accommodating game medals overflowing from the hopper 50, and further detect that the game medals in the sub-tank are full. May be provided. The full sensor can be constituted, for example, by a circuit in which when a game medal accommodated in the sub-tank becomes full, the game medal contacts a plurality of full detection sensors and energizes the signal. The detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 60 (a full error can be executed).

  Supplementary information on the sub-tank and full detection sensor. As an example, it is assumed that the slot machine 10 has at least a first full detection sensor and a second full detection sensor as a plurality of full detection sensors (the number is not limited to two). The distance between the first full detection sensor and the second detection sensor is “A”. In addition, the length of the connection component 54 (for example, the screws 54a, 54b, 54c shown in FIG. 1) for fixing the symbol display device (reel unit) 38 is set to "B". The connecting parts 54 (the screws 54a to 54c) are parts that are easily loosened by opening and closing the front door 2 (vibration by the slot machine 10 can also be a factor), and fall into the housing when detached. Has the potential. For example, in the case of FIG. 1, the screw 54c arranged on the opening side of the front door 2 can be said to be a particularly easily loosened part. Although screws 54a to 54c are given as specific examples for clarifying the description, the connecting parts 54 may be replaced with other parts attached to the slot machine 10.

  Here, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of full detection sensors are arranged so that the relationship of “A> B” is satisfied. Even when three or more full detection sensors are provided, when the minimum distance between the full detection sensors is A, the plurality of full detection sensors are set so that the relationship of “A> B” holds. Deploy. The connection component 54 (at least one of the screws and not all of the screws 54a to 54c) is configured to be stored in the sub-tank when it falls freely. In other words, the sub tank is arranged vertically below the connection component 54.

  By arranging a plurality of full detection sensors and sub tanks in this way, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment can obtain the following effects.

  First, by arranging the sub-tank vertically below the connection parts 54 (the screws 54a to 54c), even if the screw 54c is accidentally detached, for example, the sub-tank can be accommodated in the sub-tank. Loss can be prevented. Further, by preventing the screw 54c from entering the hopper 50, an effect of preventing an operation failure of the hopper 50 due to mixing of the screw 54c can be expected.

  When the dropped connecting part 54 (for example, the screw 54c) is stored in the sub-tank, if the screw 54c is caught between the fullness detection sensors, the circuit of the fullness sensor is energized by the screw 54c. However, even if the game medals are not full, a full detection signal is erroneously transmitted, and the main control board 60 erroneously executes a full error (“FE” error). However, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the plurality of full detection sensors are arranged so that the relationship of “A> B” is satisfied (the interval between the full detection sensors is longer than the length of the screw 54c). Therefore, the dropped screw 54c is stored in the sub tank without being caught by the full sensor. That is, since there is no possibility that the connection component 54 (the screws 54a to 54c) may be caught between the plurality of full detection sensors, even if the connection component 54 is unexpectedly detached, the connection component 54 may cause the detection by the full detection sensor. A signal (full detection signal) can be prevented from being transmitted. In other words, even when the connection parts 54 (the screws 54a to 54c) are disconnected during the game, no full error occurs, so that the game can be continued without hindering the game.

[2-6. Switch, external terminal board]
As shown in FIG. 4, a power switch 11, a setting key switch 12, a setting change / reset switch 13, a setting door switch 14, a door switch 15, and an external terminal board 100 are electrically connected to the main control board 60. Have been.

  The power switch 11 is a switch operated by a hall clerk when turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.

  The setting key switch 12 is a switch operated by a hall clerk when confirming the setting or changing the setting. For example, when the hall clerk checks the settings, the user inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion slot and turns it 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) while the power is on. Also, for example, when the hall clerk changes the setting, in a situation where the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and after turning 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise), the power is turned off. Turn on.

  The setting change / reset switch 13 is a single switch that functions as both a setting change switch (setting switch) and a reset switch. Note that these switches may be provided separately.

  When treated as a setting change switch, the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated by a hall clerk when changing the setting. For example, when the hall clerk changes the setting, he operates the setting change / reset switch 13 and operates the start switch 34 until the desired setting is obtained. Each time the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated once, the set value is incremented by "1" ("1" → "2" → ... → "6" → "1" → ...). ). In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the settings are set to “six stages” of the settings 1 to 6.

  When the switch is treated as a reset switch, the setting change / reset switch 13 is operated by a hall clerk when initializing (resetting) predetermined data (for example, error data) stored in the RWM 63. Specifically, when the setting change / reset switch 13 is turned on while the power is on, the reset is performed.

  The setting door switch 14 is a switch that detects opening and closing of a door (not shown) that covers the setting key switch 12 and the setting change / reset switch 13. For example, when the setting door switch 14 is off (closed) and the setting key switch 12 is on (setting key is being inserted), an error occurs.

  The door switch 15 is for detecting opening and closing of the front door 2. For example, when the front door 2 is open (the front of the base is open), the door switch 15 is turned on.

  The external terminal board 100 is a board that relays / transfers an external signal (outer end signal) output from a part of the output port 62 to the outside of the slot machine 10.

  Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (for example, a hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in a hall) via the external terminal board 100. Specifically, for example, in addition to information on the game such as the bonus state, the AT state, the number of bets of the game medals and the number of payouts, information on the game machine such as an error or power-off is output as an external signal. . The external signal is output by the main control board 60 (external signal transmitting means 77 described later) and transmitted to the outside via the external terminal board 100.

  An example of a specific external signal in the present embodiment is shown in bits D0 to D4 of the output port 6 in FIG.

[2-7. Input port, output port]
As described above, the main control board 60 includes the input port 61 (for example, the input ports 0 to 2) and the output port 62 (for example, the output ports 0 to 8) each including a plurality of ports. Hereinafter, specific examples of these ports in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the present embodiment, each of the input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 8 has 1-bit D0 to D7, respectively, and is a port that can input or output 1 byte (8 bits). The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment may be provided with an input port 61 or an output port 62 other than those shown below, but the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of the input ports 0 to 2. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of the output ports 3 to 6.

  According to FIG. 9, in the input port 0, the signal of the setting change / reset switch 13 (setting change / reset switch signal) is input to the D0 bit, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 (setting key switch signal) is input to the D1 bit. The signal (door switch signal) of the door switch 15 is input to the D2 bit. A signal output when a power failure occurs (power failure detection signal) is input to the D6 bit, and a full sensor signal (full detection signal) is input to the D7 bit.

  In FIG. 9, the D3 to D5 bits of the input port 0 are "unused". However, the ports indicated as "unused" in FIGS. 9 to 16 are not actually used, or This means any of the cases where the description is omitted, and does not necessarily mean that there is no input / output of a signal.

  In FIGS. 9 and 10, “positive” or “negative” is described in each bit of the port, which means that the digital circuit of the bit is “positive logic” or “negative logic”. Means there is. For example, according to FIG. 9, the setting key switch signal input to the D1 bit of the input port 0 has negative logic. In this case, a “positive (high)” signal is input to the D1 bit when the setting key switch 12 is not operated, and a “negative (low)” signal is input to the D1 bit when the setting key switch 12 is operated. Is entered. In other words, a “negative (low)” signal is the active signal for the setting key switch signal. If the logic is positive, the reverse is true.

  According to FIG. 9, the input port 1 receives the signal of the left stop switch 35a (left stop switch signal) at the D0 bit, receives the signal of the middle stop switch 35b (middle stop switch signal) at the D1 bit, and outputs the D2 bit. The signal of the right stop switch 35c (right stop switch signal) is input to the bit. The signal of the 3-bet switch 33b (3-bet switch signal) is input to the D3 bit, and the signal of the 1-bet switch 33a (1-bet switch signal) is input to the D4 bit. The signal of the adjustment switch 36 (the adjustment switch signal) is input to the D5 bit, and the signal of the start switch 34 (the start switch signal) is input to the D6 bit. The D7 bit is “unused”. If the bet switch 33 of the slot machine 10 is not provided with the 1-bet switch 33a but provided with only the 3-bet switch 33b, the D4 bit of the input port 0 is “unused”.

  According to FIG. 9, the input port 2 receives the signal of the reel sensor 41 (the left reel sensor signal) for the left reel 39a in the D0 bit and the signal of the reel sensor 41 for the middle reel 39b (the middle reel) in the D1 bit. Sensor signal) is input, and the signal of the reel sensor 41 (right reel sensor signal) for the right reel 39c is input to D2 bit. The signal of the payout sensor 52b (payout sensor 2 signal) is input to the D3 bit, and the signal of the payout sensor 52a (payout sensor 1 signal) is input to the D4 bit. Similarly, the signal of the closing sensor 30b (the closing sensor 2 signal) is input to the D5 bit, and the signal of the closing sensor 30a (the closing sensor 1 signal) is input to the D6 bit. Further, a signal (selector passage sensor signal) of the passage sensor 28 provided in the game medal selector 27 is input to the D7 bit.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 10, as the information processing executed by the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) to advance the game, a main process (M_MAIN) (main (Also called a loop). In the main processing, detection of the inserted game medals, prize processing after all the reels 39 have stopped, and the like are performed.

  As will be described later in detail, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) temporarily exits the main process (interrupts the main process) and executes an interrupt process (I_INTR) (timer interrupt process) when executing the main process. ). In this interrupt process, an input port reading process for detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S65 in FIG. 55) is performed, and after the execution, a process of returning to the main process is periodically performed. In the present embodiment, as an example, the execution interval of the interrupt processing is set to “2.235 ms”. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired every time the interrupt processing is executed at an interval of 2.235 ms.

  Then, based on the data of the input ports 0 to 2 acquired as described above, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) performs level data (ON (1) of each bit / OFF (0) data, input port rising data (data indicating which bit is data that was off at the previous interrupt and turned on at the current interrupt), and falling data at the input port ( The data that indicates which bit is the data that was turned on at the time of the previous interrupt and turned off at the time of the current interrupt is generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 63. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms of the interrupt cycle. Specific examples of the storage destination of the RWM 63 will be described later (FIGS. 11 to 16).

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 60 detects all of the D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, before the stop switch 35 during the rotation of the reel 39 is operated, it is meaningless to operate the bet switch 33 (the operation does not affect the game). Although it is not necessary to obtain the data of the switch signal, the data of the signal based on the operation of the bet switch 33 is obtained regardless of the situation. By doing so, all bits of data can be acquired, and for example, the on / off status of each operation switch can be known.

  According to FIG. 10, the output port 3 outputs the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 40 of the left reel 39a from the bits D0 to D3. The motor 40 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 39 by 1-2-phase excitation, and to drive the reel 39 by a combination of four-phase excitation of φ0 to φ3. A signal is output from a predetermined bit of the output port.

  Bits D4 and D5 of output port 3 are unused. The signal of the blocker 29 (blocker signal) is output from the D6 bit, and the signal of the hopper motor 51 is output from the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal). Here, for example, when the blocker signal is “1 (ON)”, the blocker 29 forms a “permitted game medal path” connecting the game medal insertion slot 26 and the hopper 50. On the other hand, when the blocker signal is “0 (OFF)”, the blocker 29 forms a “non-permitted game medal path” connecting the game medal insertion slot 26 and the payout port 53. For example, when the blocker 29 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 3 by an interrupt process.

  According to FIG. 10, the output port 4 outputs the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 40 of the middle reel 39b from the D0 to D3 bits, and the output port 5 outputs the motor of the right reel 39c from the D0 to D3 bits. Forty φ0 to φ3 signals are output. These are the same as the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 3 described above.

  From the D5 bit to the D7 bit of the output port 4, signals of the respective ON display LEDs of the status display LED 48 are output. Specifically, a signal (three-sheet insertion LED signal) of a three-sheet insertion LED (status display LED 48g) is output from the D5 bit, and a two-sheet insertion LED (status display LED 48f) is output from the D6 bit. A signal (two-sheet insertion LED signal) is output, and a signal of one-sheet insertion LED (status display LED 48e) (one-sheet insertion LED signal) is output from the D7 bit.

  The D4 bit of the output port and the D4 to D7 bits of the output port 5 are “unused”.

  According to FIG. 10, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external terminal board 100 is output from the D0 bit to the D6 bit of the output port 6. Specifically, in the present embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal payout signal, and a medal insertion signal are output.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, as an example, an external signal 5 indicating that the front door 2 is opened is output from the D0 bit, and an external signal 4 indicating that an error, power cutoff, or the like has occurred in the slot machine 10 is D1. Output from bits. Also, an external signal 3 indicating from the start to the end of the AT (ART) is output from the D2 bit, an external signal 2 indicating the continuation of the AT (ART) is output from the D3 bit, and the activation of the AT (ART) ( An external signal 1 indicating an initial hit is output from the D4 bit. An external signal (medal payout signal) indicating payout of game medals is output from the D5 bit, and an external signal (medal insert signal) indicating insertion of game medals is output from the D6 bit.

  Note that the external signal output from the output port 6 is not limited to the above, and may output an external signal indicating a specific game state (such as an RT state or a BB game state).

  The input port 61 and the output port 62 in the slot machine 10 have been described above. In the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores data based on the input ports 0 to 2 in one interrupt process (within one interrupt) and outputs a signal based on the stored control data to the output port. Output from 0-8.

[2-8. RWM stored data]
In the present embodiment, of the storage area of the RWM 63, a part of the addresses “F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” is allocated to the used area, and the remaining storage area is allocated to the stack area or the unused area. . Therefore, in order to temporarily store the data used in the game (excluding the data in the stack area), in the used area, an address as a storage destination of each data is allocated in order from the address “F000 (H)”. ing. The amount of information that can be stored in one address is one byte.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the slot machine 10 may store a different program (generally, also referred to as a second program) outside the above-mentioned use area of the RWM 63. In such a case, for example, , RWM63 addresses “F210 (H)” to “F3FF (H)” can be used together.

  11 to 16 are diagrams (parts 1 to 6) showing storage addresses (addresses) of data stored in the RWM and their contents. A specific example of data stored in the RWM 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. The data shown in FIGS. 11 to 16 is an example of data used in the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 63 is not limited to these. Specifically, for example, there is an external signal output flag “_FL_INF_OUT” that stores a flag relating to the output of the external signal.

  First, each data shown in FIG. 11 will be described.

  “_NB_BANK” of the address “F000” is a storage area for the setting value data. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting values are set in “six steps” from setting 1 to setting 6 (for example, a higher setting value is more advantageous to the player). In the case of the setting 1, the set value data is set to “0”, and the set value data increases each time the set value increases by one. That is, the setting value data in the case of setting 6 is “5”. Therefore, any value of “0” to “5” is stored as a normal value in “_NB_BANK” according to the current setting value.

  Although the details will be described later, when the setting value is changed by operating the setting change / reset switch 13, the setting value processing is performed by the main control board 60 (see FIG. 28 described later) to update the setting value data. (Step S115 in FIG. 28). The setting value display LED 66 (digit 5) is displayed with reference to the setting value data.

  “_PT_IN0_OLD” of the address “F008” is a storage area for input port 0 level data. The input signal from the input port 0 is read every time the interrupt processing is performed, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN0_OLD” is updated based on the calculation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN0_UP” of the address “F009” is a storage area for input port 0 rising data. The rising data of the input port 0 is calculated by the main control board 60 each time the input port 0 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 12 will be described.

  “_PT_IN1_OLD” at the address “F00A” is a storage area for input port 1 level data. The input signal from the input port 1 is read every time the interrupt processing is performed, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN1_OLD” is updated based on the calculation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN1_UP” of the address “F00B” is a storage area for input port 1 rising data. The rising data of the input port 1 is calculated by the main control board 60 every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 13 will be described.

  “_PT_IN2_OLD” of the address “F00C” is a storage area for the input port 2 level data. The input signal from the input port 2 is read every time the interrupt process is performed, and the level data in each bit of “_PT_IN2_OLD” is updated based on the calculation result of the level data by the main control board 60.

  “_PT_IN2_UP” of the address “F00D” is a storage area for input port 2 rising data. The rising data of the input port 2 is calculated by the main control board 60 every time the above-described input port 2 level data is updated, and is updated based on the calculation result.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 14 will be described.

  “_FL_SUB_INF2” of the address “F013” is a data storage area of the “sub notification flag 2”. In the “sub notification flag 2”, information on the occurrence of a predetermined error is stored in addition to the reception states of some operation switches. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, whether or not an operation on each stop button (stop switch 35) can be accepted is stored in the D0 to D2 bits of the sub notification flag 2, and the D3 bit is stored in the D3 bit. Whether or not an operation on the three-sheet insertion button (3-bet switch 33b) can be received is stored. The bits D4 to D6 of the sub notification flag 2 store the presence or absence of detection of a predetermined error (in order, a CH error, a C0 error, and a H0 error).

  “_CT_SEN_CHK” at the address “F016” is a data storage area of the input monitoring counter. The insertion monitoring counter is a counter for monitoring the passage abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 of the game medal selector 27, and has any value of “0” to “255”.

  Although the details will be described later, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is initialized when the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) module is executed (see FIG. 39). Further, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is incremented by “1” when the D7-bit selector path sensor signal is “1 (ON)” in the input port 2 rising data (“_PT_IN2_UP” of the address “F00D”) ( Step S612 in FIG. 57). Then, when it is determined that the game medal has passed normally during the execution of the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) module accompanying the insertion of the game medal, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is subtracted by “1” (see FIG. 45). Step S350). In other words, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is “+1” when a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and “−1” when the game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 30. This is a counter that repeats “+1” and “0”. Note that in the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK), the result of the subtraction is compared with “3”, and if no carry (borrow) occurs, it is determined to be abnormal (error) (steps S348 in FIG. 18A, FIG. 45). Step S351).

  “_NB_CREDIT_LED” of the address “F01C” is a storage area of the stored number display data. The stored number display data is data stored in order to display the stored number at the present time on the stored number display LED 47.

  Here, in the present embodiment, while the data itself stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is a hexadecimal number (H), a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed on the stored number display LED 47 is “29”, “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stores “29 (H)”. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F01C”. At this time, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are used for displaying the lower digit (here, “9”) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used for displaying the upper digit (here, “ 2 "). In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the data value stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  In this embodiment, the RWM 63 is not provided with an address for storing the stored number data itself, and the stored number display data is provided as display data of the stored number display LED 47. However, the stored number display data is substantially the stored number data itself.

  “_FL_MEDAL_STS” of the address “F01E” is a data storage area of the game medal management flag. The game medal management flag is a flag for mainly controlling turning on / off of the status display LED 48.

  In the game medal management flag, the start switch reception state of the D0 bit indicates the reception state of the start switch 34 (start lever), and when the operation of the start switch 34 can be received (for example, a game medal is bet to a specified number). (The state before the start of the game), and becomes “1” when the operation to the start switch 34 cannot be accepted (for example, during rotation of the reel 39). On / off of the game start LED (the status display LED 48d) is controlled based on the data value stored in the D0 bit.

  In the game medal management flag, the blocker state of the D2 bit indicates the state of the blocker 29, and is “1” when the blocker 29 is in the ON state (permitted position), and the blocker 29 is in the OFF state (non-permitted position). At this time, it becomes "0". Since the current state of the blocker 29 can be determined based on the value of the D2 bit, based on the value, a loading enable display LED (status display LED 48b) indicating whether a game medal can be loaded or not. Is turned on / off.

  In the game medal management flag, the D3 bit replay display LED is a flag for controlling the turning on / off of the replay display LED (status display LED 48a) which is turned on at the time of winning the replay. The D3 bit is set to "1" when a replay is displayed and a game medal is automatically inserted as a replay (step S241 in FIG. 37), and is set to "0" when the game by the replay is completed (step S241). Step S49 in FIG. 34). The status display LED 48a turns on when the D3 bit is “1”, and turns off when the D3 bit is “0”.

  In the game medal management flag, the D4 bit settlement display LED is set to “1” when the settlement switch 36 is operated to settle the bet medals and / or the stored medals, and is set to “0” when the settlement of the stored medals is completed. " When the D4 bit is "1", the settlement display LED (status display LED 48c) is turned on, and when the D4 bit is "0", the settlement display LED (status display LED 48c) is turned off.

  In the game medal management flag, the setting change disable flag of the D6 bit is set to “0” when the setting can be changed (OFF) and set to “1” when the setting cannot be changed (ON). " In the present embodiment, the value is set to “1” when the start switch 34 is operated and the game is advanced (step S493 in FIG. 53), and is set to “0” when the reception of the game medal for the next game is started. (Step S233 in FIG. 37).

  When a setting change is to be performed in the slot machine 10, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the value is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change impossible flag is “1”, when it is determined that a non-recoverable error (for example, an abnormality related to updating of a random number determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted, and based on the setting change. It is possible to cancel the unrecoverable error. In the present embodiment, a period (state) in which the setting cannot be changed is provided, but the configuration may be changed so that the setting can be changed at any time. In that case, the setting change disable flag need not be provided.

  In the game medal management flag, the D7 bit game medal limit determination is set to “1” when the number of betted game medals reaches a predetermined medal limit number (specified number), and when the number is not reached, “1” is set. 0 ".

  For example, when one game medal is inserted and the game medal limit determination is “0”, the main control board 60 performs a process of adding a game medal to a bet (one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC)). When the game medal limit determination is “1”, a process of adding the game medal to the credit (reserved) (addition of one reserved number (M_CREDIT_ADD)) is performed. As described above, by using the flag for the game medal limit determination, the main control board 60 determines which of the above-described processes is to be executed without referring to the bet number and calculating whether or not the specified number can be reached. Since the determination can be made, the overall processing load can be reduced.

  “_FL_ACTION” of the address “F01F” is a data storage area of the operation state flag. In the operation state flag, replay (replay) is assigned to the D0 bit, BB is assigned to the D3 bit, and RB is assigned to the D4 bit. For example, when a replay has been won, the replay is activated, and when the game is set (step S214 in FIG. 35), the D0 bit is set to "1". Then, when the replay game ends (step S49 in FIG. 34), the D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0”. Similarly, "1" or "0" is stored for the D3 bit and the D4 bit according to the operation state. The “unused” bit of the operation state flag can be appropriately assigned when a bonus or the like (for example, two types of BB or CB) not provided in the present embodiment is added.

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 15 will be described. Each data shown in FIG. 15 is data used as a timer, and the timer value of each timer is stored in a continuous storage area of addresses “F021” to “F02D”. In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer (a 1-byte timer group, also referred to as a 1-byte timer storage area) in which a timer value (a 1-byte timer value) is stored in a 1-byte storage area and a 2-byte storage area A 2-byte timer (2-byte timer group, also referred to as a 2-byte timer storage area) for storing a timer value (2-byte timer value) is provided. Note that this is only an example, and a timer (for example, a 3-byte timer) that stores a timer value in a storage area of 3 bytes or more may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, each of the above timer values is decremented by "1" each time one interrupt process is performed (every one interrupt). Although details will be described later, the interrupt process (I_INTR) (see FIG. 55) is a process executed at a period of 2.235 ms during the execution of the main process (M_MAIN) (see FIG. 34). By executing the module of measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) (see FIG. 56), each timer value is subtracted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the plurality of one-byte timers and the plurality of two-byte timers are each configured to be stored in a continuous storage area. And a 2-byte timer group are stored in a continuous storage area. Specifically, seven one-byte timers are stored at addresses “F021” to “F027”, and three two-byte timers are stored at addresses “F028” to “F02D”.

  In the present embodiment, when storing a 2-byte timer value, it is assumed that the lower digit of the timer value is stored at a lower address (upper address) and the upper digit of the timer value is stored at a higher address (lower address). Although the description is not limited to this, the lower digits may be stored at the lower address and the upper digits may be stored at the upper address.

  In the present embodiment, by arranging a plurality of timers (timer values) at such consecutive addresses, the processing load of the process of updating (subtracting here) each timer value in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) can be reduced. Can be. Details will be described later in the description of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT).

  Each timer shown in FIG. 15 will be described.

  “_TM1_OUT_CNT” of the address “F021” is a timer storage area of the external signal output time, in which a timer value of a 1-byte timer for measuring the output time of the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal is stored. “_TM1_OUT_CNT” is set to “46” as an initial value, and the timer value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt. When it is determined that the timer value has become "0", "46" is set again, and the count of subtracting "1" for each interrupt is continued.

  “_TM1_STOP” of the address “F022” is a timer storage area of the spinning cylinder stop reception standby time, and after receiving an operation on one stop button (stop switch 35a to 35c), the next stop button (stop switch 35a). A timer value of a 1-byte timer for measuring a standby time until an operation in to 35c) is received is stored. In the present embodiment, when it is confirmed that the operation of one stop button has been accepted, “_TM1_STOP” is set to the initial value “7”, and “1” is decremented for each interrupt, and the timer value is set to “0”. , The operation to the next stop button can be accepted. Then, when an operation on the next stop button is received, the initial value “7” is set again in the timer value of “_TM1_STOP”, and a count of subtracting “1” for each interrupt is performed.

  “_TM1_PAY” of the address “F023” is a timer storage area of the payout sensor check time, which is a timer value of a 1-byte timer for monitoring payout detection after the hopper motor 51 stops driving and detecting a game medal clogging. Is stored. In the present embodiment, in step S420 of FIG. 48 described below, the timer value of “_TM1_PAY” is set to the initial value “46”, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.

  “_TM1_COND_OUT” of the address “F024” is a timer storage area of the condition device output time, and the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information and the accessory condition device information) to be output as a test signal. The timer value of the 1-byte timer for measuring the “condition device output time” corresponding to “1” is stored. In the present embodiment, after the minimum game time (see “_TM2_GAME” described later) has elapsed, the timer value of “_TM1_COND_OUT” is set to “49”, and “1” is decremented for each interrupt. In this embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt process is set to 2.235 ms, 107.28 ms (2.235 ms × 48 = 107.280 ms) is counted by 48 interrupts, and this 107.28 ms is used as the condition device. This is the signal output time. More specifically, winning and replay condition device information is output in the first 24 interrupts, and bonus condition device information is output in the second 25 to 48 interrupts.

  “_TM1_CH_CHK” of the address “F025” is a timer storage area of the selector passage stay time, and stores a timer value of a 1-byte timer for detecting abnormal passage of the passage sensor 28 (game medal clogging). In the present embodiment, when the abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 is started, the timer value of “_TM1_CH_CHK” is set to the initial value “200”, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. When the timer value becomes “0” and the passage sensor 28 detects a game medal, it is determined that an error has occurred.

  “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” of the address “F026” is a timer storage area for the blocker OFF monitoring time, and is used to monitor the standby time for preventing the “blocking of game medals” by the blocker 29 of the game medal selector 27. The timer value of the byte timer is stored. More specifically, the blocker OFF monitoring time is a timer for measuring a standby time until the blocker 29 is changed from the OFF state (non-permitted position) to the ON state (permitted position). Specifically, the timer value of “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” is such that the initial value “144” is set when the selector passage sensor signal rises (when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising data “_PT_IN2_UP” becomes “1”). It is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, the control of changing the blocker 29 from OFF to ON is not permitted.

  In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, about 322 ms (2.235 ms × 144 = 321.840 ms) due to 144 interrupts is the blocker OFF monitoring time. In the present embodiment, the monitoring time at blocker OFF is a time sufficient for the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, It is assumed that a time sufficient to reach the predetermined position where the flow to the hopper 50 is determined beyond the position of the blocker 29) is set, and the above-mentioned 144 interrupt (about 322 ms) is one example.

  “_TM1_BLON_CHK” of the address “F027” is a timer storage area of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON, and is used to monitor a standby time for preventing “swallowing of game medals” by the blocker 29 of the game medal selector 27. The timer value of the byte timer is stored. More specifically, the blocker ON monitoring time is a timer for measuring a standby time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position).

  Specifically, the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is set to an initial value “45” when the selector passage sensor signal rises (when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising data “_PT_IN2_UP” becomes “1”). It is set, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, the control of changing the blocker 29 from ON to OFF is not permitted.

  In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, about 101 ms (2.235 ms × 48 = 100.575 ms) due to 45 interrupts is the monitoring time when the blocker is ON. In the present embodiment, the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is a time sufficient for the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, It is assumed that a sufficient time until the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b) is detected after passing through the blocker 29) is set, and the above-described 45 interrupt (about 101 ms) is an example thereof. In other words, the time difference between the initial value “45” and the final value “0” of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is determined by a game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to the insertion sensors 30 (30a, 30b). The time is set longer than the time required for detection.

  “_TM2_HE_CHK” of the addresses “F028” and “F029” is a timer storage area of the game medal payout device control time, in which a timer value of a 2-byte timer for measuring the control time of the game medal payout device 49 is stored. You. Specifically, when the settlement or payout of the game medals by the game medal payout device 49 is started, the timer value of “_TM2_HE_CHK” is set to the initial value “2686” (the value of the lower address “F029” is displayed on the data). At “00001010”, the value of the upper address “F028” is set to “01111110”, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, the game medal payout device 49 cannot start the settlement or payout of the next game medal. In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, specifically, the game medal payout device control time is “about 6 seconds” (2.235 ms × 2686 ≒ 6000 ms). .

  “_TM2_BACK_OFF” of the addresses “F02A” and “F02B” is a timer storage area of a game standby display start time, in which a timer value of a 2-byte timer for measuring a standby time for performing a game standby display is stored. You. Specifically, at the start of the module execution of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) (in other words, after the game is over), the timer value of “_TM2_BACK_OFF” is set to the initial value “26846” (the lower address “F02B on data”). Is set to "01101000" and the value of the upper address "F02A" is set to "11011110" (step S211 in FIG. 35). After that, the timer value of the two-byte timer is decremented by "1" for each interruption process. When the timer value becomes “0”, in the module execution of the waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP), the “game medal payout number data“ _NB_PAY_MEDAL ”for displaying the payout number of game medals on the acquired number display LED 47. (Not shown) "(step S292 in FIG. 41).

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt processing is set to 2.235 ms, the time required for the timer value to become “0” is approximately 60 seconds (2.235 ms × 2. 26846 ≒ 60000 ms = 60 seconds). That is, in the present embodiment, when the game has not been played for a predetermined time (about 60 seconds), a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. For example, when there are “9” payouts, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 changes from “09” or “* 9” indicating the payout number to “00”, “* 0”, or "**" ("*" means unlit). As a result, even if the player stops the game by operating the settlement switch after the payout of “9”, information indicating that “9” has been paid (“09” or “*”) 9)) is changed after about 60 seconds by clearing the display. With this configuration, when a player finishes the game and leaves the seat, it is possible to notify another player or a person related to the hall that the game is completely completed.

  However, even in such a case, the display of the replay display LED (the status display LED 48a), the stored number display LED 45, and the insertion display LED (the status display LED 48e to the status display LED 48g) is not cleared. Thereby, even if the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared by the game standby display, the information regarding the continuation of the game is continuously displayed. Can be prevented from being misunderstood that the game has been completely ended, and the player can be prevented from suffering disadvantages.

  “_TM2_GAME” of the addresses “F02C” and “F02D” is a timer storage area of the minimum game time, and stores a timer value of a 2-byte timer for monitoring one minimum game time. The timer value is stored, for example, at a predetermined timing before a predetermined process for rotating the reel 39 (all reels) is executed. In “_TM2_GAME”, “1836” is set as an initial value (in the data, the value of the lower address “F02D” is “00000111” and the value of the upper address “F02C” is “00101100”), and one interrupt is performed. Is subtracted by "1" each time. In the present embodiment, since the execution cycle of the interrupt process is set to 2.235 ms, the minimum game time of the present embodiment is set to “4” by multiplying the execution cycle of the interrupt process by the initial value of “_TM2_GAME”. .1 second "(2.235 ms × 1836/4100 ms).

  Next, each data shown in FIG. 16 will be described.

  “_NB_CND_NOR” of the address “F048” is a data storage area of the winning and replay condition device number. The condition device number may be referred to as winning information or the like. When a winning combination is determined by performing a winning combination, a value corresponding to the winning combination is stored in the storage area. In the present embodiment, the winning and replay condition device numbers are set to “0” to “39” (see FIGS. 24 and 25A), so that “_NB_CND_NOR” is any of “0” to “39”. Is stored. The values stored in the storage area are used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 39, AT lottery (addition during AT), and effect lottery by the sub-control board 80.

  “_NB_CND_BNS” of the address “F049” is a data storage area of the accessory condition device number. In the present embodiment, one type BB is set as the accessory condition device (see FIG. 25 (B)). Therefore, “_NB_CND_BNS” is set to “0 (non-winned) depending on whether the type BB has been won. "Or" 1 (win) "is stored. Like the value of “_NB_CND_NOR”, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is used for selection of a stop position determination table used for stop control of the reel 39, AT lottery (addition during AT), effect lottery by the sub control board 80, and the like. Used.

  In the case where a plurality of special roles (for example, one type BB and one type BB) are provided, “_NB_CND_BNS” is set based on the character condition device number of the special role that has been won. Any of "0" to "2" is stored in a base number. In addition, when a plurality of special roles (for example, one type BB (1), one type BB (2), two types BB (1), two types BB (2)) are provided, “_NB_CND_BNS” is used. Similarly, any of "0" to "4" is stored in decimal notation.

  When the winning number of the special role is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”, when the winning information is carried over without displaying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning special role (internal game), “_NB_CND_BNS” ”Is stored.

  “_PT_MEDAL_LED” of the address “F060” is a storage area of the insertion number display LED signal data. The insertion number display LED signal data is data for controlling turning on / off of the insertion display LED, and three to one insertion display LEDs (status display LED 48g, status display LED 48f, The status display LED 48e) is assigned. For example, when only the D7 bit is “1”, control is performed so that only the one-sheet insertion display LED (status display LED 48e) is turned on. Further, for example, when the D7 bit and the D6 bit are “1” and the D5 bit is “0”, the one-sheet insertion LED (status display LED 48 e) and the two-sheet insertion LED (status display LED 48 f) are turned on. Controlled.

  “_PT_BLK_HPM” of the address “F061” is a data storage area of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal. The D6 bit is used as the blocker signal, and the D7 bit is used as the hopper motor drive signal. When the blocker 29 is turned on (permitted position), the D6 bit is set to "1", and when the blocker 29 is turned off (non-permitted position), the D6 bit is set to "0". More specifically, “_PT_BLK_HPM” of the address “F061” is updated in the main process (FIG. 34), and the data of the output port 3 (see FIG. 10) is updated based on the data of the address in the interrupt process (FIG. 55). Is generated. As a result, the main control board 60 controls the operation of the blocker 29. The hopper motor drive signal for controlling the driving of the hopper motor 51 is similar to the blocker signal. When the hopper motor 51 is driven, the D7 bit is set to “1”. When the hopper motor 51 is not driven, the D7 bit is set. The bit is set to "0".

  “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is a storage area of the game medal number data. The number of game medals bet (number of bets) is stored in the game medal number data, and since the upper limit of the number of bets is three in the present embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is set. It is memorized.

  “_CT_MEDAL_IN” of the address “F06F” is a data storage area of the number of times of medal insertion signal output, and stores values of “0” to “6”. The number of times the medal insertion signal is output indicates the number of times the bet number of the game medal is output as a signal to the outside, and the number of times the bet number is doubled is output. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bets is “3”, and therefore the maximum value of the number of times of outputting the medal insertion signal is “6”. At this time, the specific output of the external signal is “on (first)”, “off (second)”, “on (third)”,..., “Off (sixth)”. Is repeated until the sum of ON and OFF becomes the number of outputs.

  “_CT_MEDAL_OUT” of the address “F070” is a data storage area of the number of times of medal payout signal output, and in the present embodiment, a value of “0” to “20” is stored. The number of medal payout signal outputs indicates the number of times the number of game medal payouts is output to the outside as a signal, and the number of times the number of payouts is doubled is output. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of game medal payouts associated with winning is "10" (for example, winning 20 in FIG. 22), and therefore the maximum value of the number of medal payout signal outputs is "20". For example, when the maximum value of the number of payout game medals is set to “15”, the maximum value of the number of times of output of the medal payout signal is “30”.

[2-9. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 80 shown in FIG. 4 controls effects and the like during the game and during the game standby.

  The main control board 60 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 60 (especially the control command transmitting means 78) sends information (control information) necessary for outputting the effect to the sub-control board 80. Command) is transmitted by one-way parallel communication. The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to be electrically connected, and may be connected using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, in either case of the electrical connection or the optical communication connection, the present invention is not limited to the parallel communication, but may be a serial communication or a combination of the two.

  The sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like, like the main control board 60. Each of these components is mounted on the MPU on the sub-control board 80. Further, in addition to the RWM with the built-in MPU, an RWM (external RWM) is mounted outside (but on the sub-control board 80) of the MPU. Hereinafter, the RWM 83 includes an RWM with a built-in MPU and an external RWM. FIG. 4 is merely an example, and the configuration of the sub-control board 80 is not limited to this.

  The input port 81 is a connection for inputting signals to the sub CPU 85 from the control command transmitting means 78 of the main control board 60 and peripheral devices for performance (for example, various operation switches such as the cross key 22 and the performance button 24). Department. The output port 82 is a connection unit for outputting a signal from the sub CPU 85 to a peripheral device for effect (for example, the speaker 20 or the image display device 21). That is, the sub-control board 80 (sub-CPU 85) and the peripheral devices for these effects are electrically connected via the input port 81 and the output port 82.

  The RWM 83 is a storage device (also referred to as a “storage unit”) from which data can be read and written, and various data (for example, image data) necessary for the sub CPU 85 (sub control board 80) to control effects and the like. Parameters related to the display of the effect screen on the display device 21).

  The ROM 84 is a read-only storage device (also referred to as a “storage unit”), and includes programs and various data (for example, production data) required for the sub CPU 85 (sub control board 80) to control the production and the like. And a data table for performing a lottery related to the effect).

  The sub CPU 85 refers to a CPU mounted on the sub control board 80, and controls an effect or the like according to a program stored in the ROM 84 (for example, determines an effect screen to be displayed on the image display device 21).

  In the sub-control board 80, effects and the like are controlled by the operation of the sub CPU 85 (which may be regarded as an MPU), and an effect control means 87 for controlling execution of the effects and the like is realized.

  The effect control unit 87 is based on a control command (specifically, for example, an RT number, a pressing order instruction number, an effect group number, an accessory condition device number, and the like) transmitted from the main control board 60 by the control command transmitting unit 78. At what timing (for example, at the time of operating the start switch 34 or at the time of operating each stop switch 35, etc.) according to the winning combination and the game state, what kind of effect is output by the peripheral device for effect. (For example, how to turn on, blink, or turn off the effect lamp 19, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 20, and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 21) are selected by lottery. decide.

  Then, the effect control means 87 controls the output of the effect peripheral devices (the effect lamp 19, the speaker 20, and the image display device 21) according to the above determination. Furthermore, during the BB game of one kind or during the AT (ART), the effect control means 87 notifies the pressing order of the stop switch 34 and displays an image of the acquired number, the number of remaining games, and the like.

  A description will be given of effect peripheral devices connected to the sub-control board 80.

  The effect lamp 19 is configured by, for example, an LED or the like, and lights in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect lamp 19 includes a back lamp arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 39, a fluorescent lamp for illuminating a design on the reel 39 from above the reel 39, and a front lamp 2 on the front of the front door 2 of the slot machine 10. A frame lamp or the like that is arranged and blinks at a predetermined timing is included. Among them, the back lamp of the reel 39 illuminates the symbol displayed on the reel 39 from behind, thereby increasing the visibility of the symbol (the upper, middle, and lower symbols) on the reel 39 seen from the display window 17.

  The speaker 20 outputs a predetermined sound during execution of a variety of effects during a game or a game standby.

  During the game, the image display device 21 displays various effect images and the like (for example, an effect corresponding to a correct answer pressing order and a lottery result of a role), game information and the like (for example, the number of games during the operation of a character or during an AT, Display device, etc.). The image display device 21 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, or the like. Note that the display by the image display device 21 is not limited to during a game, and display during a game standby is also possible.

  The cross key 22 and the menu button 23 are used when displaying information (for example, a two-dimensional code including the game history of the player) intended by the player (for example, corresponding to an operation of a “menu screen”, which will be described later in detail). This is used when the hall manager changes various settings.

[3. Specific configuration of main control board]
A specific configuration of the main control board 60 in the slot machine 10 according to the embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 10, the game played by the player is controlled by the main control board 60 (main CPU 65).

  Here, first, an outline of one game will be described. When the three bet switch 33b is operated in a state where no game medal is bet, a signal indicating that the three bet switch 33b is operated is input to the main CPU 65, and the main CPU 65 displays three game medals. Bet. When the start switch 34 is operated in a state where three (specified number) game medals are bet, a signal indicating that the start switch 34 has been operated is input to the main CPU 65 and the main CPU 65 (role lottery means 69). The main CPU 65 (reel control means 70) drives the motor 40 while the lottery is selected. That is, the main CPU 65 (reel control means 70) rotates all the reels 39.

  When, for example, the left stop switch 35a is operated in a state where all the reels 39 are rotating, a signal indicating that the left stop switch 35a is operated is input to the main CPU 65, and the main CPU 65 (reel control means 70 ) Drives the motor 40. That is, the rotation of the left reel 39a corresponding to the left stop switch 35a is stopped.

  In a state where the rotation of all the reels 39 is stopped, the main CPU 65 (display determination means 71) determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations. (Display determination / winning determination). Then, for example, when the main CPU 65 (the display determination means 71) determines that the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination, the main CPU 65 (the payout means 72) deletes the game medal. Pay out.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 60 is realized by the operation of the main CPU 65, the combination lottery means 69, reel control means 70, display determination means 71, payout means 72, RT control means 75, external signal transmission Means 77 and a control command transmitting means 78. In the following, the arrangement of symbols, combinations, combinations of symbols, and the like in the present embodiment will be described, and then the above-described units in the main control board 60 will be described.

  Note that each unit of the main control board 60 illustrated in FIG. 4 is merely an example in the present embodiment, and the main control board 60 may perform other operations (for example, pressing based on the result of the role drawing). A push order instruction number selecting means for selecting the order instruction number, an effect group number selecting means for selecting an effect group number corresponding to the result of the winning lottery, and the like may be provided.

[3-1. Arrangement of symbols, combinations, combinations of symbols, etc.]
First, the arrangement of symbols, combinations, combinations of symbols, and the like in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of symbols on each reel. FIG. 17A shows an arrangement of symbols on each reel 39 (left reel 39a, middle reel 39b, right reel 39c). In FIG. 17B, each symbol and the name of each symbol are summarized. In FIG. 17A, for convenience of description, symbol numbers (symbol numbers) are also shown. Incidentally, “blank” in FIG. 17 does not mean that no symbol is printed, but a blank symbol is printed.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the reel tape attached to each reel 39 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is printed for each frame. Specifically, 20 symbols (symbol numbers “0” to “19”) are printed on each reel tape.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining the display of symbols when the reel is stopped. FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining a display position of a symbol, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an effective line.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, a display window 17 is provided on the front door 2 so that nine symbols (three consecutive symbols on each reel 39) can be seen from the display window 17. Has become. At this time, the display positions of the three consecutive symbols on the left reel 39a, which can be seen from the display window 17, are referred to as “upper left”, “middle left”, and “lower left” in order from the top, and the middle reel 39b The display positions of three consecutive symbols in are referred to as “middle upper stage”, “middle middle stage”, and “middle lower stage” in order from the top, and the respective display positions of three consecutive symbols on the right reel 39c. Are referred to as “upper right”, “middle right”, and “lower right” in order from the top.

  FIG. 18B shows an example of a state in which the rotation of all the reels 39 has been stopped, and the effective lines are indicated by broken lines.

  In the present embodiment, as a linear display line extending across the three reels 39a to 31c, a display line of upper left, middle upper, and upper right, a display line of left middle, middle, and right middle, and a lower left, There are a display line of middle lower stage-lower right stage, a display line of upper left stage-middle middle stage-lower right stage, and a display line of lower left stage-middle middle stage-upper right stage. It should be noted that there may be non-linear display lines (for example, upper left-middle middle-upper right display lines).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18B, the upper left-middle-middle-lower right display line is set as a valid line, and all other display lines are set as “invalid lines”. Note that the display lines set as the active lines are not limited to the upper left-middle-middle-lower right display lines, and other display lines (e.g., upper left-middle upper-right upper display lines) may be used. It may be set to an active line. In addition, a plurality of display lines (for example, upper left-middle upper-right display line and upper left-middle-middle-lower display line) may be set as active lines.

  In the case of FIG. 18B, “blue seven-blue seven-blue seven” is displayed on the active line. That is, the main control board 60 (display determination means 71 described later) determines that a combination of symbols corresponding to one type BB is displayed on the active line (see FIG. 19).

  19 to 23 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 5) for explaining symbol combinations. FIG. 19 to FIG. 23 summarize the symbol combinations, the condition devices, and the benefits given when the symbol combinations are displayed on the activated lines. 19 to 23, for convenience of explanation, the numbers of the symbol combinations are also shown. Further, in FIG. 23, in the game that has been won in the pushing order bell (winning A group), the symbol combination displayed when the player loses the combination (“Pattern 01 (the symbol combination number“ 85 ”to“ 88 ”). ")" And "Pattern 02 (design combination numbers" 89 "to" 92 ")") are also shown.

  As described above, the condition devices are broadly divided into condition devices related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device for the accessory, condition devices related to the replay, and condition devices related to winning.

  The combinations of the symbols shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 and the condition devices corresponding to the combinations of the symbols will be described.

  The symbol combination number “1” shown in FIG. 19 is a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device. In the present embodiment, a condition device (one type BB) related to the operation of one accessory or the continuous operation device of the accessory is provided as a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the continuous operation device for the accessory. In addition, SB, RB, CB, or two types of BB may be provided as a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to one type of BB is displayed on the activated line, one type of BB (a continuous operation device for a special type of special type) and an RB (a first type of special type) operate. . In other words, the transition from the normal game (non-RT, any of RT1 to RT4) to the type 1 BB game (at the time of type 1 BB operation (at the time of RB operation)). During one type of BB game, the payout rate is designed to exceed “1”. That is, the one-type BB game is an advantageous game for the player who can expect to obtain more game medals than the normal game.

  The symbol combination numbers “2” to “31” shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device related to the replay. In the present embodiment, 11 condition devices (re-game 01 to re-game 11) related to re-games are provided as condition devices related to re-games.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the re-games 01 to 11 is displayed on the activated line, the game medals are automatically bet. In other words, a replay can be performed (replay). Therefore, “re-game 01 to re-game 11” is also referred to as “replay”.

  Note that when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, the RT may shift. Specifically, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay game 01 is displayed on the activated line in RT1 or RT2, the process shifts to non-RT. Therefore, "re-game 01" is also called "RT shift replay". If the non-RT is an RT that is more disadvantageous for the player than RT1 or RT2, “re-game 01” is also referred to as “demotion replay”. However, in RT4, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, it does not shift to non-RT.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is displayed on the activated line, the RT shifts. More specifically, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 04 is displayed on the activated line at RT1, the process proceeds to RT2. Therefore, “re-game 04” is also called “RT shift replay”. If RT2 is a more advantageous RT for the player than RT1, "Replay 04" is also referred to as "Promotion Replay."

  The symbol combination numbers "32" to "84" shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 are symbol combinations corresponding to the condition devices related to winning. In the present embodiment, 23 condition devices related to winning (winning 01 to winning 23) are provided as condition devices related to winning.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, nine game medals are paid out. When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the invalid line (the left middle-middle middle-right middle display line). Therefore, “winning 01” is also called “bell”.

  As will be described later, the winning prize 01 operates in the game in which the pushing order bell (winning A group, winning prize B group) is won. Note that the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is “PB = 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answering order in the game in which the pushing order bell (winning A group, winning B group) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is changed. It is always displayed on the activated line, and nine game medals are paid out.

  Further, in the game that has won the common bell (winning C), only winning 01 operates. As described above, the combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 is “PB = 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a common bell (win C) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the win 01 is always displayed on the activated line, and nine game medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the prize 02 to the prize 09, the prize 15, and the prize 16 is displayed on the activated line, one game medal is paid out.

  As will be described later, in the game that has been won in the pushing order bell (winning A1), winning 02, winning 04, winning 07, and winning 09 are activated. In the game that has won the pushing order bell (winning A2), winning 03, winning 05, winning 06, and winning 08 are activated. Winning 02, winning 05, winning 06, and winning 09 are activated in the game which has won the pushing order bell (winning A3). In the game which has won the pushing order bell (winning A4), winning 03, winning 04, winning 07 and winning 08 are activated. Winning 02, winning 05, winning 07, and winning 08 are activated in the game which has won the pushing order bell (winning A5). In the game that has won the pushing order bell (winning A6), winning 03, winning 04, winning 06, and winning 09 are activated. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning prize 02 to the winning prize 09 is “PB ≠ 1”.

  In addition, in the game which is won in the pushing order bell (winning B1), winning 02 to winning 09 operate. In the game which has won the pushing order bell (winning B2), winning 02 to winning 09 and winning 15 are activated. In the game which is won in the pushing order bell (winning B3), winning 02 to winning 09, winning 16 are activated. As described above, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning prize 02 to the winning prize 09 is “PB ≠ 1”. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 15 and the winning 16 is also “PB ≠ 1”.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to winning 10 to winning 12 is displayed on the activated line, four game medals are paid out. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, "winning 10" is also called "oblique watermelon". Further, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 11 is displayed on the activated line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the invalid line (upper left-middle upper-right upper display line). When the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the invalid line (middle left-middle middle-right middle display line). Therefore, "winning 11, winning 12" is also called "parallel watermelon". The “winning 10 to winning 12” is also referred to as “watermelon”.

  As will be described later, the winning 10 is activated in the game that has won the weak watermelon (winning D). The combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is “PB ≠ 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game that has been won as the weak watermelon, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed in the activated line by operating the stop switch 35, and four game medals are paid out.

  In addition, in the game that has been won as the strong watermelon (winning E), winning 10 to winning 12 are activated. As described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 10 is “PBＰ1”. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 11 and the winning 12 is also “PB「 1 ”. That is, in the present embodiment, in the game that has been won as the strong watermelon, depending on the operation of the stop switch 35, any one of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the winning 10 to the winning 12 is displayed on the active line, and four gaming medals are displayed. Will be paid out.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the prize 13 and the prize 14 is displayed on the activated line, two game medals are paid out. When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is displayed on the activated line, “Cherry-Cherry / Red Seven-Cherry / Omitted” is displayed on the invalid line (the display line on the left middle-middle middle-right middle). Is done. Therefore, "winning 13" is also called "middle cherry". When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, “Cherry / Omitted-Cherry / Red Seven-Omitted” is displayed on the invalid line (lower left-middle upper-upper right display line). Is done. Therefore, "winning 14" is also called "corner cherry". The “winning 13, winning 14” is also referred to as “cherry”.

  As will be described later, the winning prize 14 is activated in a game in which a weak cherry (winning F) is won. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 14 is “PB = 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when the weak cherry is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is always displayed on the activated line, and two game medals are paid out.

  In addition, in the game which has won the strong cherry (winning H), winning 13 and winning 14 are activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the winning 13 is “PBＰ1”. However, as described above, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is “PB = 1”. That is, in the present embodiment, when a strong cherry is won, one of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the winning 13 and the winning 14 is always displayed on the active line, and two game medals are paid out.

  When the combination of the symbols corresponding to the prizes 20 to 23 is displayed on the activated line, ten game medals are paid out.

  As described later, in the game that has been won as JAC1 (winning N), winning 20 to winning 23 are activated. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the prizes 20 to 23 is “PB = 1”. That is, when the JAC1 is won, any of the combinations of the symbols corresponding to the winning prize 20 to the winning prize 23 is always displayed on the activated line, and ten game medals are paid out.

  Further, in the game that has been won in JAC2 (winning O), winning 21 and winning 23 are activated. As described above, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 21 and the winning 23 is “PB = 1”. That is, when the player wins JAC2, one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prize 21 and the winning prize 23 is always displayed on the activated line, and ten game medals are paid out.

  In addition, in the game that has been won in JAC3 (winning P), winning 20 and winning 22 are activated. As described above, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 20 and the winning 22 is “PB = 1”. That is, when the player wins the JAC3, one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prize 20 and the winning prize 22 is always displayed on the activated line, and ten game medals are paid out.

  In addition, in the game that has been won in JAC4 (winning Q), winning 20 and winning 21 are activated. As described above, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning prize 20 and the winning prize 21 is “PB = 1”. That is, when the player wins JAC4, one of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning prize 20 and the winning prize 21 is always displayed on the activated line, and ten game medals are paid out.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 and the pattern 02 is displayed on the active line, the RT may shift. Specifically, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the active line in the non-RT, RT2, or RT3, the process shifts to RT1. However, in RT4, even if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the active line, the process does not shift to RT1.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong push sequence in a game in which the push order bell (winning A group) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the active line. RT may shift.

  In the present embodiment, in a game that has been won in the pushing order bell (winning A group), when the relevant combination is missed, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is always displayed on the activated line. However, in a game in which the push order bell (winning A group) is won, even when the player loses the combination, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 may not be displayed on the activated line.

  One of the above-described condition devices BB does not end its operation unless the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line in the activated game. However, the operation of the re-game 01 to the re-game 11 and the prize 01 to the prize 23 ends even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line in the activated game.

  In addition, when it has SB, RB, CB, or two types of BB as a condition device related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, the RB or the two types of BB correspond to the activated game. If the symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line, the operation does not end. However, the operation of the SB or CB ends even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed on the activated line in the activated game.

[3-2. Role lottery means]
Next, the role lottery means 69 will be described. The role lottery means 69 performs a role lottery. Note that the “result of lottery lottery” is also referred to as “result of lottery lottery” or “lottery result”. Further, "to perform a lottery (lottery of a role)" means to select a role or to determine a role. Therefore, the “role lottery means 69” is also referred to as “role selection means 69” or “role determination means 69”.

  The role lottery means 69 includes, for example, a random number generating means (hardware random number or the like) for lottery, a random number extracting means for extracting a random number generated by the random number generating means, and a random number value based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means. Determination means for determining the presence or absence of the winning and the winning combination.

  The random number generating means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, a total of 65536 random numbers from “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is a random number, for example, a counter that counts one in 200 nanoseconds keeps counting as one cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”, and the random number generating means is used while the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Keeps counting random numbers.

  The random number extracting means extracts a random number generated by the random number generating means at a predetermined timing (in the present embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated (turned on) by the player). The determination unit determines the combination corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by comparing the random number value extracted by the random number extraction unit with the combination lottery table (see FIG. 26).

  FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 are diagrams (Nos. 1 and 2) for explaining each role. 24 and 25 summarize the condition device number, the effect group number, the name of the role, the common name of the role, the condition device to be activated, and the presence / absence of the number for each RT. In FIGS. 24 and 25, description of a part of the winning combinations to be drawn in the slot machine 10 is omitted.

  The effect group numbers shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 are numbers in which the roles are grouped to such an extent that the type of the winning combination can be determined. For example, by the effect group number selecting means (not shown), the role lottery means 69 The selection is made in accordance with the result of the role lottery and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the control command transmitting means 78. Although a detailed description of the effect group number is omitted, in the present embodiment, the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 without transmitting the winning and replay condition device number pertaining to the winning combination. Thus, the winning combination can be estimated on the sub-control board 80 side within a certain range (for example, in which range of the winning A group or the winning B group has been won), and it corresponds to the effect group number. It is possible to select an effect and output it.

  As described above, the winning combination includes a bonus (the condition device related to the accessory or the continuous operation device for the role is activated), a replay (a condition device related to the replay is activated), and a small combination (the condition device related to the winning). Operates).

  The “condition device number” is a number for specifying the winning combination (condition device that operates). In other words, the “condition device number” shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (A) is the “winning and replaying condition device number”, which is the winning small role (condition device related to the activated winning) or the winning. This is a number for specifying a replay (operating re-game condition device). The “condition device number” shown in FIG. 25 (B) is the “accessory condition device number”, which is a winning bonus (a condition device related to the operation of the activated accessory or the accessory continuous operation device). Is a number for specifying

  Then, “〇” in the “presence / absence of numbers” column means that there is a number in the winning combination lottery table (see FIG. 26). In other words, it means that the winning combination is a winning combination. Further, “×” in the “presence / absence of numbers” column means that there is no number in the role lottery table (see FIG. 26). In other words, it means that the role is not a lottery target of the role lottery.

  First, the bonus will be described.

  The accessory condition device number “1” shown in FIG. 25B is a bonus. In the present embodiment, one bonus (one type BB) is provided as a bonus. That is, when the first type BB is won, the accessory condition apparatus number is “1”, and when the first type BB is not won, the accessory condition apparatus number is “0”. Note that SB, RB, CB, or two types of BB may be provided as a bonus.

  For the type 1 BB (the character condition apparatus number is “1”), depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated, a combination of symbols corresponding to the type 1 BB is displayed on the activated line, and the type BB and RB are activated. I do. In other words, it shifts to the time of one type BB operation (at the time of RB operation).

  In general, when a bonus is won, there are a case where the bonus is won by itself, a case where the bonus is won by overlapping with the replay, and a case where the bonus is won by overlapping with the small role. In the present embodiment, when one type of BB is won, a single BB is won (setting 2 to setting 6), and a case where the same BB is won in repetition of a re-game E (setting 2 to setting 6), There is a case in which a winning is repeated with a replay game F described later (setting 1 to setting 6) (see FIG. 26).

  In general, when a winning is made overlapping with a replay or a winning is made overlapping with a small role, in this game, a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay and the small combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Note that a combination of symbols corresponding to a bonus in the current game may be preferentially displayed on the activated line. In the present embodiment, in the case where the winning is performed overlapping with the replaying game E or the case where the winning is performed overlapping with the replaying game F, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the replaying game E and the replaying game F is prioritized in the current game. It is displayed on the active line.

  Next, a loss, a replay, and a small role will be described.

  The winning and replay condition apparatus number “0” shown in FIG. 24 is a loss. That is, when the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the winning and replaying condition device number is “0”. Note that the accessory condition apparatus number is not affected by the result of the winning lottery being lost. In other words, if the result of the winning lottery is lost when the accessory condition device number is “0”, the accessory condition device number remains “0” and the accessory condition device number is “1”. At a certain time (for example, when the winning information of the bonus is carried over), if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the bonus condition apparatus number remains “1”.

  The winning and replaying condition device numbers “1” to “15” (partly not shown) shown in FIG. 24 are replays. In the present embodiment, as replays, 15 replays (replay A1 to replay A6, replay B1 to replay B3, replay C, replay D (not shown), replay E, replay F, replay G (not shown) and replay H (not shown)). The re-games A1 to A6 are also collectively referred to as “re-game A group”, and the re-games B1 to B3 are also collectively referred to as “re-game B group”.

  For the re-games A1 to A6 (winning and re-game condition device numbers "1" to "6"), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 04 is valid. It is displayed on the line, and shifts to RT2. Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the order of incorrectly pressing, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 01 is displayed on the activated line, and the process shifts to non-RT. In other words, the replay A1 to the replay A6 are replays in which the result of the obtained game is different depending on the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Therefore, “re-game A1 to re-game A6” is also referred to as “push order replay”. The game medal is automatically betted when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 is displayed on the activated line, and when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 01 is displayed on the activated line.

  In addition, the correct answer pressing order in the replay A1 is “left / center / right”, the correct push order in the replay A2 is “left / right / middle”, and the correct push order in the replay A3 is “middle / left”.・ The right answer order in replay A4 is “middle / right / left”, the correct push order in replay A5 is “right / left / middle”, and the correct push order in replay A6 is The probability that the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 04 is displayed on the activated line is “right / middle / left”, and all of the re-games A1 to A6 are “1/6”. That is, the re-game A1 to the re-game A6 is a six-select push order replay.

  For the re-game B1 to the re-game B3 (winning and re-game condition device numbers "7" to "9"), when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer pressing order, the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is valid. It is displayed on the line (RT does not shift). Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the order of incorrectly pressing, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay game 01 is displayed on the activated line, and the process shifts to non-RT. In other words, the replay B1 to the replay B3 are replays in which the result of the obtained game is different depending on the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Therefore, “re-game B1 to re-game B3” is also referred to as “push order replay”. The game medal is automatically betted when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is displayed on the activated line and when the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line.

  Also, the correct answer pressing order in the replay B1 is “left first”, the correct push in the replay B2 is “middle first”, the correct push in the replay B3 is “right first”, The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 02 is displayed on the activated line is "1/3" for all of the re-games B1 to B3. In other words, the replay B1 to the replay B3 are three-selection push order replays.

  Regarding the re-game C (winning and re-game condition device number “10”), a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. That is, the replay C is a replay in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. Therefore, "replay C" is also called "replay (normal replay)".

  Replay C is a replay that is a target of a lottery lottery only in non-RT and RT4. Therefore, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, the RT does not shift. When a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, a game medal is automatically bet.

  Regarding the re-game E (winning and re-game condition device number “12”), a symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. That is, the re-game E is a re-play in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. However, as described above, there is a case where the re-game E is won by overlapping with one type BB (setting 2 to setting 6). Therefore, "replay E" is also called "chance replay". Also, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 03 is displayed on the activated line, the RT does not shift. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 03 is displayed on the activated line, a game medal is automatically bet.

  Here, as described above, in the re-game E, when the setting is 2 or more, a part of the re-game E is an overlap winning with one type BB (re-game E + 1 type BB). More specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the number of “replay E + 1 type BB” is set to “0” in the combination lottery table of setting 1, and is not a lottery target. On the other hand, in the role lottery tables of the settings 2 to 6, a predetermined value equal to or more than “1” is set in the number of “replay E + 1 type BB”, and there is a possibility of a duplicate winning (see FIG. 26 for details). ). The predetermined value of the setting number in the combination lottery table of the settings 2 to 6 may be the same value for each setting or may be a different value. Such a situation where the winning probability (including lottery / no lottery) differs depending on the setting is referred to as “there is a setting difference, there is a setting difference”. In other words, the re-game E may be won alone, but is a replay in which a part of the re-game E is overlapped with one type BB, and the winning probability of the re-game E of “re-game E + 1 type BB” is different from the set probability. Have.

  Regarding the re-game F (winning and re-game condition device number "13"), a combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 03 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. That is, the re-game E is a re-play in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. However, as described above, the re-game F is won by overlapping with the type BB (setting 1 to setting 6). Therefore, "replay F" is also called "chance replay". Also, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 03 is displayed on the activated line, the RT does not shift. When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 03 is displayed on the activated line, a game medal is automatically bet.

  Here, the re-game F always wins with one type BB at the time of winning (re-game F + 1 type BB). That is, the replay F does not win alone. Strictly speaking, in RT4, which is an internal middle game, the re-game F is won alone, but in this case, since the winning information of the bonus (one type BB) is carried over, it is included in the double win in a broad sense.

  “Re-game F + 1 type BB” is different from the above-mentioned “re-game E + 1 type BB” in that there is no setting difference in the winning probability. Specifically, according to FIG. 26 described later, in any of the combination lottery tables of the settings 1 to 6, the number of “29” is set for “replay F + 1 type BB”. In summary, the replay F is a replay in which the special combination (one type BB) is repeatedly won, and the winning probability of the repeated winning has no setting difference.

  The winning and replaying condition device numbers “16” to “39” (partly not shown) shown in FIG. 24 are small wins. In the present embodiment, 24 small roles (winning A1 to winning A6, winning B1 to winning B3, winning C, winning D, winning E, winning F, winning G (not shown), winning H, winning I are used as small wins. (Not shown), winning J (not shown), winning K (not shown), winning L (not shown), winning M (not shown), winning N, winning O, winning P, winning Q). . Winnings A1 to A6 are also collectively referred to as “winning A group”, and winnings B1 to B3 are also collectively referred to as “winning B group”.

  Winnings A1 to A6 (winning and replaying condition device numbers "16" to "21") are displayed in the activated line when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer pressing order. Then, nine game medals are paid. Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the wrong push sequence, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning prize 02 to the winning prize 09 (limited to the activated one) is effective depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. It is displayed on the line and one game medal is paid out. When the stop switch 35 is operated in the order of the incorrect pressing, depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated, a combination of symbols corresponding to the pattern 01 or the pattern 02 is displayed on the active line, and the process proceeds to RT1. May be. That is, the winning prize A1 to the winning prize A6 are small wins in which the result of the game to be obtained differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the invalid line (display line on the left middle-middle-middle-right middle). Is done. Therefore, “winning A1 to winning A6” is also referred to as “push order bell”.

  The correct answer in the prize A1 is "left first", the correct answer in the prize A2 is "left first", and the correct push in the prize A3 is "middle first". The correct answer pressing order is “middle first”, the correct answer pressing order in winning A5 is “right first”, the correct pressing order in winning A6 is “right first”, and a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 01 Is displayed on the active line is "1/3" in each of the winning A1 to the winning A6. That is, the prize A1 to the prize A6 are three selection pressing bells.

  Winnings B1 to Winning B3 (winning and replaying condition device numbers "22" to "24") are displayed in the activated line when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer order in which the symbols corresponding to winning 01 are displayed. Then, nine game medals are paid out. Further, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the order of incorrectly pressing the symbols, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning prize 02 to the winning prize 09 (limited to the activated one) is displayed on the activated line, and one game medal is displayed. Will be paid out. That is, the winning combinations B1 to B3 are small wins in which the result of the game to be obtained differs depending on the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the invalid line (display line on the left middle-middle-middle-right middle). Is done. Therefore, “winning B1 to winning B3” is also referred to as “push order bell”.

  The correct answer in the prize B1 is "left first / middle first", the correct push in the prize B2 is "middle first / right first", and the correct push in the prize B3 is "right first". The probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the active line is “2/3” for each of the winning B1 to the winning B3.

  In the present embodiment, in the game state in which the instruction function does not operate (during non-AT), the stop switch 35 may be operated in the correct answer order in the game in which the push order bell (winning A group, winning B group) is won. If there is (there is an increase in the number of game medals), the stop switch 35 may be operated in an incorrectly depressed order (the game medals may decrease), and the increase in the game medals is suppressed. A game section can be formed. On the other hand, in the game state in which the instruction function is activated (during AT), the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer order in accordance with the instruction function in the game that has been won in the push order bell (winning A group, winning B group) (game medal). Increases), and a game section in which the game medals increase can be formed.

  Regarding the winning C (winning and replaying condition device number “25”), a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35, and 9 game medals Will be paid out. That is, the winning C is a small winning combination in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. Further, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 01 is displayed on the active line, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the invalid line (the display line on the left middle-middle middle-right middle). Is done. Therefore, "winning C" is also called "bell (common bell)".

  Winning D (winning and replaying game condition device number “26”) is a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 10 depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Displayed on the activated line, four game medals are paid out. That is, the winning D is a small winning combination in which the result of the obtained game differs depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. Further, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, "winning D" is also called "weak watermelon".

  The winning E (winning and replaying condition device number “27”) is a symbol corresponding to winning 10 to winning 12 depending on the timing of operation of the stop switch 35 regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Are displayed on the activated line, and four game medals are paid out. That is, the winning E is a small winning combination in which the result of the game obtained differs depending on the timing at which the stop switch 35 is operated. Further, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 10 is displayed on the activated line, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the activated line. Further, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 11 is displayed on the activated line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the invalid line (the upper left-middle upper-right upper display line). Is done. Then, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning 12 is displayed on the active line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is displayed on the invalid line (the display line on the left middle stage-middle middle stage-right middle stage). Is done. Therefore, "winning E" is also called "strong watermelon".

  In the present embodiment, when a strong watermelon (winning E) is won, the combination of the symbols corresponding to winning 11 and winning 12 is displayed on the activated line with priority. When a strong watermelon (winning E) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 10 may be preferentially displayed on the activated line.

  Regarding the winning F (winning and replaying game condition device number “28”), a combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35, and two game medals Will be paid out. That is, the winning F is a small win in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. Further, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, the “Cherry / Omitted-Cherry / Red Seven-Omitted” is invalid line (lower left-middle middle-upper right). Display line). Therefore, "winning F" is also referred to as "weak cherry".

  Regarding the winning H (winning and replaying condition device number “30”), a combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 13 or the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 35, and two Game medals are paid out. That is, the winning H is a small win in which the obtained game result does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. As described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is displayed on the activated line, “Cherry-Cherry / Red Seven-Cherry / omitted” is displayed on the invalid line (middle left-middle middle-right middle). Display line). Further, as described above, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning 14 is displayed on the activated line, the “Cherry / Omitted-Cherry / Red Seven-Omitted” is invalid line (lower left-middle middle-upper right). Display line). Therefore, "winning H" is also called "strong cherry".

  In the present embodiment, when a strong cherry (winning H) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning 13 is preferentially displayed on the activated line. When a strong cherry (winning H) is won, a combination of symbols corresponding to winning 14 may be preferentially displayed on the activated line.

  The winning N, the winning O, the winning P, and the winning Q (winning and replaying condition device numbers "36" to "39") are determined by winning 20 to winning 23 (actuation) regardless of the order in which the stop switch 35 is pressed. Are displayed on the activated line, and ten game medals are paid out. In other words, the winning N, the winning O, the winning P, and the winning Q are small wins in which the result of the game does not differ even if the stop switch 35 is operated in any order. Further, each of the winning N, the winning O, the winning P, and the winning Q is a small winning combination which is a target of the winning lottery only when one type of BB is activated (when the RB is activated). Therefore, “winning N, winning O, winning P, winning Q” are also referred to as “JAC (JAC1 to JAC4)”.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of the role lottery table used in the role lottery. In the present embodiment, a different role lottery table is used for each setting (setting 1 to setting 6) and RT (non-RT, RT1 to RT4, type 1 BB operation (at the time of RB operation)). FIG. 26 shows the numbers for each RT in the setting 1. In FIG. 26, the replay D, the replay G, the replay H, the winning G, and the winning I to the winning M are omitted. In FIG. 26, some of the numbers are omitted. However, it is assumed that the omitted number has at least one value.

  In the role lottery table shown in FIG. 26, the total number of placed numbers (total placed number) is “65536”. Therefore, the winning probability of the winning combination in the winning lottery is calculated by dividing the number by "65536". For example, the winning probability of the replay A1 at RT is “1437/65536”.

  As described above, one type of BB may be won alone, may be won over the re-game E, or may be won over the re-game F, and these are distinguished in FIG. ing. Specifically, “1 type BB” means a case where one type BB wins alone, and “re-game E + 1 type BB” means a case where one type BB overlaps with the re-game E and wins. “Re-game F + 1 type BB” means a case where one type BB overlaps with re-game F and wins. Further, “re-game E” means a case where the re-game E wins alone, and “re-game F” means a case where the re-game F is won alone.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the setting 1, the re-game E may not be won by overlapping with the type 1 BB, and may be won by overlapping with the type 1 BB when the setting is 2 or more. In FIG. 26, the number of “re-game E” in RT1 is “327” and the number of “re-game E + 1 type BB” is “0” in any RT. E can be won alone, but it can be seen that there is no case where one of the BBs wins.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, the number of “re-game E + 1 type BB” is “1” or more in the setting 2 or more, so the re-game E in the setting 2 or more overlaps with the type 1 BB. It can be seen that there are cases where the winner is won. That is, it can be seen that there is a setting difference in the winning probabilities of “replay E + 1 type BB”.

  In the present embodiment, the re-game F may be won by overlapping with one type BB. In FIG. 26, the number of “re-game F” is “0” in any RT of the non-internal middle game, and the number of “re-game F + 1 type BB” in RT1 is “29”. It can be seen that the replay F in the setting 1 does not win alone, but may win the same type BB. Although not shown, the setting number of “replay F + 1 type BB” is “29” even at the setting 2 or more. That is, it can be seen that there is no setting difference in the winning probabilities of “replay F + 1 type BB”.

  In the present embodiment, there is no difference in winning probability between the winning combinations other than “re-game D (not shown)”, “winning C”, “1 type BB”, and “re-game E + 1 type BB”.

[3-3. Reel control means]
The reel control means 70 will be described. The reel control unit 70 rotates the reel 39 by driving the motor 40. Further, the reel control means 70 stops the rotation of the reel 39 by driving the motor 40.

  When the start switch 34 is operated, the reel control means 70 drives the motor 40 to rotate the reel 39 (the left reel 39a, the middle reel 39b, and the right reel 39c). Then, after the rotation speed of the reel 39 reaches a fixed speed (a speed of about 80 rotations per minute), any one of the stop switches 35 (the left stop switch 35a, the middle stop switch 35b, and the right stop switch 35c) is operated. Then, based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery means 69, the stop position of the reel 39 (the left reel 39a, the center reel 39b, the right reel 39c) corresponding to the stop switch 35 is determined, and the motor 40 is turned on. The reel 39 is driven to stop the rotation of the reel 39 at the determined stop position.

  The rotation of the reel 39 is stopped within 190 ms after the stop switch 35 is operated, but the reel control means 70 determines that the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is an effective line as much as possible. , The rotation of the reel 39 is stopped (pull-in control), and the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the activated line ( Control kicking).

  Specifically, the symbols from the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated to the symbols four points ahead are symbols that can be displayed (pulled in). For example, referring to FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" on the left reel 39a is located on the active line (upper left), four positions ahead of the position are operated. Up to the bell symbol of symbol number "5" is a symbol that can be displayed on the active line (upper left).

  It is also possible that not only the design at the moment when the stop switch 35 is operated but also the design from one to four ahead is a design that can be displayed (pulled in). In this case, for example, referring to FIG. 17, when the left stop switch 35a is operated at the moment when the replay symbol of the symbol number "1" of the left reel 39a is positioned on the effective line (upper left), From the watermelon symbol of the previous symbol number "2" to the replay symbol of the symbol number "6" ahead of four are the symbols that can be displayed on the active line (upper left).

  That is, when there is a symbol constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination among the symbols that can be displayed (pulled in), the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the symbol is displayed. (Retract control). However, if there are no symbols that can be displayed (pulled in) in combination with the symbol corresponding to the winning combination, the combination is omitted.

  When there are a plurality of symbols that can be displayed (pulled in) under the control of the reel control means 70, the symbols constituting the combination of the winning combination, the stop switch 35 is pressed by any one of the symbols. The symbols to be displayed preferentially are determined in advance according to the order in which they are operated or the timing when the stop switch 35 is operated, and the rotation of the reel 39 is stopped so that the symbols are displayed (pull-in control). .

[3-4. Display determination means, payout means]
The display determining means 71 will be described. When all the reels 39 have stopped rotating, the display determination means 71 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any combination.

  Next, the payout means 72 will be described. When the payout means 72 determines by the display determination means 71 that the combination of the symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the small winning combinations, Pay out game medals. The payout means 72 automatically bets game medals when the display determination means 71 determines that the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the replays. You may.

[3-5. RT control means]
The RT control means 75 will be described. The RT control unit 75 determines whether or not the RT transition condition is satisfied, based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery unit 69 and the result of the determination by the display determination unit 71, and determines that the RT transition condition is satisfied. When it is done, the RT is shifted.

  Although all detailed descriptions are omitted, some of the RT transition conditions in the present embodiment are as described in the remarks column of FIG. Specifically, for example, when the stop switch 35 is operated in the correct answer pressing order in the game that has been won in the re-game A group at RT1, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 04 is displayed on the activated line. , RT control means 75 shifts the RT state to RT2. On the other hand, when the stop switch 35 is not operated in the correct answer pressing order in the game that has been won in the re-game A group in RT1, the combination of symbols corresponding to the re-game 01 is displayed on the activated line, and at this time, the RT control Means 75 shifts the RT state to non-RT.

[3-6. External signal transmission means]
The external signal transmitting means 77 will be described. The external signal transmitting unit 77 transmits an external signal to the external terminal board 100. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, in the present embodiment, for example, information about AT (ART), error information, information about payout of game medals and bets, and the like are output as external signals to the output port 62 (output port 6). ).

  The main control board 60 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (step S48 in FIG. 34) for confirming the end of each game and the game. When an external signal is transmitted when the game end check process is executed. Is generated. Then, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR), the output data of the external signal output from the output port 6 is set (stored in the B register), and the external signal is transmitted to the external terminal board 100 (steps S73 and S74 in FIG. 55). .

  When the external signal transmitted from the output port 6 is input to the external terminal board 100, it is transmitted to an external device (for example, the hall computer 200) connected to the external terminal board 100. As a result, the hall computer 200 can obtain the game information of the slot machine 10 (for example, activation and continuation of the ART, payout of the game medal, etc.) from the received external signal, so that it can be used for management of the slot machine 10. it can. Further, the hall computer 200 can output game information of the slot machine 10 to a data counter or the like based on the received external signal. In the case of a data counter or the like arranged near the slot machine 10, the external signal may be directly received from the external terminal board 100 by being connected to the external terminal board 100.

[3-7. Control command transmission means]
The control command transmitting means 78 will be described. The control command transmitting unit 78 transmits various information (control commands) necessary for the sub-control board 80 to control an effect or the like to the sub-control board 80.

  The information transmitted by the control command transmitting means 78 includes information indicating that a game medal has been inserted, information based on a lottery result of a winning combination (winning combination), information indicating that the rotation of the reel 39 has started, and a stop switch 35. , The information that the reel 39 has stopped, the information of the stop position of each reel 39 (the symbol stopped on the activated line), the information of the winning combination, the gaming state (for example, the presence or absence of AT / ART) and the internal state. Information and the like.

[4. Control processing by main control board]
The information processing by the main control board 60 (mainly by the main CPU 65 but may be omitted hereinafter) in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described based on a flowchart. In the following description, an outline of each process for various processes performed in the information processing by the main control board 60 is shown in a flowchart, but these drawings do not show all of the information processing by the main control board 60. Rather, they are merely an overview or a partial description. In each drawing, English notation together with the processing name (for example, “program start (M_PRG_START)” shown in FIG. 27) is an example of a program module name.

[4-1. Program start]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_START). The process of “program start (M_PRG_START)” is a process performed when information processing by the main control board 60 is started. The main CPU 65 reads out and executes a predetermined program stored in the ROM 64. Note that this process may be considered as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 27, when the “program start” process is started, in step S11, the main control board 60 (main CPU 65) initializes a register.

  The initialization of the register in step S11 means that an initial value necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 is set in various registers, and specific processing is, for example, a serial processing provided in the main CPU 65. Setting of the communication speed of the communication circuit, setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to a maskable interrupt), setting of a parity bit to be added to a control command to be transmitted (for example, setting to even parity) and the like can be given. .

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of registers that can be used by the main control board 60 are provided. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 65 includes a plurality of registers such as an A register to an L register and a transmission register. are doing. Each register is a 1-byte register capable of storing 1-byte (8-bit) information. For example, by using two registers together such as an “HL register”, 2-byte (16-bit) information can be stored. It may be a storable 2-byte register.

  Next, in step S12, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value. The power-off processing completed flag is a flag (not shown) for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on. Process (IS_POWER_DOWN) "is stored in the RWM 63. Details of the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) are shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S12 that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value (that is, an abnormal value) (NO in step S12), the checksum calculation of the RWM 63 (steps S13 to S14) is not performed. Proceed to step S15.

  In step S13, the main control board 60 calculates the checksum of the RWM 63. Specifically, the check is performed in the same range (for example, a work area, an unused area, and a stack area used in the program) as the checksum calculation of the RWM 63 (step S624 in FIG. 58) executed in a power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) described later. Calculate the sum. In step S13, the 1-byte data stored in the RWM 63 is added.

  Next, in step S14, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation in step S13 has been completed for the entire planned range of the RWM 63. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 63 for which the checksum has been calculated at the present time, and it is determined whether or not the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed (NO in step S14), the process returns to step S13, and the checksum calculation is continued. If it is determined that the checksum has been calculated (YES in step S14), the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the present embodiment, even in the processing described below, when initializing data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 63, the same processing as described above is executed in the specified range of the RWM 63. Shall be.

  In step S15, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and that the checksum calculation of the RWM 63 has been normally completed in the entire range, that is, from YES in step S12 to step S14 via YES in step S14. When S15 is reached, a normal value is stored as power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value, or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation of the RWM 63, that is, when the process proceeds to step S15 via NO in step S12, If any abnormality (for example, the checksum value is abnormal) is detected in S13 to S14, the abnormal value is stored as power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S16, the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD” (see FIG. 11) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register).

  Then, in a step S17, it is determined whether or not the “designated switch” is on based on the input port 0 level data. Here, the "designated switch" is a signal of the door switch 15 (a D2 bit door switch signal) and a signal of the setting key switch 12 (a D1 bit setting key switch signal) among the input ports 0. Only when all such designation switches are on, that is, when the door switch signal is on (the front door 2 is open) and the setting key switch signal is on (the setting key is inserted) (step S17) YES), setting change is permitted. Therefore, when all the designated switches are on in step S17, the state can be shifted to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), and the process first proceeds to step S18. On the other hand, if at least one of the designated switches is not on (NO in step S17), the shift to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is not permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. In this way, by assigning a designated switch composed of a plurality of switch signals to the same input port (input port 0 in this example), it is easy to determine whether or not the designated switch is on all at once.

  In step S18, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a power-off / recovery abnormality. If it is determined to be abnormal (YES in step S18), the process proceeds to step S21. (NO in step S18), and proceeds to step S19. It is possible to determine whether or not the power-off recovery error is based on the value of the power-off recovery data stored in the register in step S15. For example, it is determined that there is no power-off recovery error (power-off recovery normal).

  In step S19, it is determined whether or not the setting change is not possible. When it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (YES in step S19), the process proceeds to step S20 because the shift to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is not allowed, and it is determined that the setting change is possible. If this has been done (NO in step S19), the process proceeds to step S21, where a setting change process (M_RANK_SET) is executed. Whether or not the setting cannot be changed can be determined based on the value of the setting change impossible flag. If the value indicates that the setting cannot be changed, it is determined that the setting cannot be changed. to decide.

  The setting change disable flag is one (D6 bit) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63, and is used in a main process (M_MAIN) described later with reference to FIG. During the period from the role lottery process (step S41) to the game end check process (step S49), a value indicating impossibility is set. Details of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) are shown in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the setting change disable flag is provided is described. However, if the setting change is always possible, the setting change disable flag may not be provided. In that case, the processing corresponding to step S19 is unnecessary.

  In step S20, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery is normal. Whether or not the power-off recovery is normal can be determined based on the value of the power-off recovery data stored in the register in step S15, as in step S18. If it is an abnormal value, it is determined that the power-off recovery is not normal (power-off recovery error).

  When the main control board 60 determines in step S20 that the power-off recovery is normal (YES in step S20), the process proceeds to step S22, and executes the power-return processing (M_POWER_ON). Details of the power return process are shown in FIG.

  When the main control board 60 determines in step S20 that there is a power-off / return abnormality (NO in step S20), the process proceeds to step S23, and executes a non-returnable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). Details of the non-recoverable error processing are shown in FIG. The non-recoverable error means an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process is executed, and includes a plurality of patterns of errors. For example, when it is determined in step S20 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, information indicating the “E1” error is displayed in a predetermined digit as an “E1” error unrecoverable error.

[4-1-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET). Note that this process may be considered as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 28, first, in step S101, the main control board 60 stores a “predetermined range” in a register as an initialization range of the RWM 63. The process in step S101 is a set for preparing for a case where it is determined that the power-off process has been executed normally. Specifically, the setting value data, the game state (for example, the RT state), the winning flag, and the like are not initialized. The initialization range excluded in this manner is referred to as a “predetermined range”.

  Next, in step S102, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data stored in step S15 in FIG. 27 is a normal value. When it is determined that the data is a normal value (YES in step S102), the process proceeds to step S104. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not a normal value (NO in step S102), the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the main control board 60 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 63. Here, the “specific range” is a target range different from the “predetermined range” in step S101. Specifically, when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, the initialization range in which the setting value data, the game state, the winning flag, and the like are also included in the initialization target is defined as a “specific range”.

  Next, proceeding to step S104, the main control board 60 starts the initialization of the RWM 63 for the "predetermined range" set in step S101 or the "specific range" set in step S103. In the next step S105, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S104 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization is not completed (NO in step S105), the process returns to step S104, and when it is determined that the initialization is completed (YES in step S105), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing are set as the start setting of the interrupt processing. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is used as an interrupt process, and thus corresponds to a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle (2.235 ms). Then, after the process of step S106, an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the configuration is such that the interrupt process is not executed before the “interrupt activation” process of step S106 is performed.

  Next, in step S107, an output request set at the start of the setting change is performed. In this process, a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set (stored) in a register in order to notify the sub-control board 80 of the start of the setting change process.

  Although the “output request set” is often executed in the processing described below, it means a processing of setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, as in the processing in step S107. Further, the control command referred to here does not mean only a command to be actually transmitted, but also includes a command that is a source of a command to be actually transmitted.

  Next, in step S108, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). Although the control command set 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 29, this is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 63). The “control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET)” is often executed also in the processing described below, but means processing for storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as in step S108. I do. In the present embodiment, the control command data includes first control command data and second control command data, and different first control command data and second control command data are transmitted according to an output request.

  Next, in step S109, the main control board 60 sets a waiting time (wait time), and in the next step S110, executes a wait process for waiting for the elapse of the waiting time set in step S109.

  In the present embodiment, in step S109, the number of interrupts “224” is set as the waiting time, and in step S110, the number of interrupts is counted down to “224” (1 is subtracted for each number of interrupts, and the set number of interrupts is reduced). The wait process is executed (until “0”). Since the time for one interrupt is 2.235 ms as described above, waiting for 224 interrupts results in a wait processing of about 500 ms (2.235 ms × 224 times = 500.64 ms). The wait time is a time for which a sufficient time is secured for completing the initialization of the RWM 83 by the sub control board 80. Further, in the following description, “wait processing” refers to a process of waiting so as not to execute the next process (step) until a predetermined time has elapsed. However, even during the wait processing, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed.

  As described above, the reason why the wait process is executed in step S110 is that the initialization process of the RWM 63 on the main control board 60 side (step S114) is completed in a relatively short time, while the sub control board 80 side is similar. The initialization process (details are omitted) of the RWM 83 performed in (1) takes a relatively long time, so that the time is adjusted on the main control board 60 side. In the slot machine 10, since data input from the sub control board 80 to the main control board 60 is not permitted, the main control board 60 cannot know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the sub control board 80 side. Therefore, on the main control board 60 side, a wait process is executed for sufficient time adjustment.

  To give a specific example, the clear range of the RWM 63 of the main control board 60 (the range cleared in accordance with the setting change) is, for example, 512 bytes of the address “F000 (H) to F1FF (H)”. On the other hand, the clear range of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is, for example, about 12 to 13 gigabytes of the address “000000 (H) to 800000 (H)”. Therefore, the time required for the initialization processing may be greatly different between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80, and the progress of the control processing by the main control board 60 and the progress of the control processing by the sub control board 80 It is effective to perform the above-described wait processing in order to prevent the synchronization of the data with the data.

  The control command at the start of the setting change set in steps S107 and S108 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the wait processing in step S110. However, while the wait processing is being executed in step S110, the processing after step S111 is not started (in other words, the main processing does not proceed). With this configuration, the sub-control board 80 can control and output effects based on various commands at a timing synchronized with the processing of the main control board 60.

  After the wait processing in step S110, in step S111, the main control board 60 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. In the present embodiment, the set value is an integer of any one of “1” to “6”, and the set value data “_NB_BANK” corresponding to the set value is stored in the RWM 63. As described above with reference to FIG. 11, the normal range of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is a value corresponding to “0” to “5”. In step S111, it is determined whether or not the value of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is within the normal range. If it is determined that the value is not within the normal range (for example, a value indicating “6” or more is stored), The process proceeds to step S113 via step S112. In step S112, “1” is stored as the set value (that is, “0” is stored in the set value data “_NB_BANK”). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S111 that the set value is within the normal range (a value indicating “0” to “5” is stored) (YES in step S111), the process proceeds to step S112 without performing the process in step S112. Proceed to S113.

  In step S113, the main control board 60 performs display control (lighting) of the LED whose setting is being changed. By performing the process of step S113, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, the LEDs (the set value display LED 66 and the acquired number display LED 47) displayed during the setting change can be turned on. In the present embodiment, in step S113, a process of updating the value of the display data is performed in order to display the current set value on the set value display LED 66 and display “−−” on the acquired number display LED 47. Since the above values have been initialized in step S104, they are "0" before updating.

  Next, in step S114, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has been detected. Specifically, the rising edge data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is determined, and it is determined whether the D0 bit to which the setting change / reset switch signal is assigned is “1 (ON)”. If the D0 bit is “1”, it is determined that the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has been detected (YES in step S114), and the process proceeds to step S116 via the process in step S115. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is not “1”, it is determined that the operation of the setting change / reset switch 13 has not been detected (NO in step S114), and the process proceeds to step S116 without performing the process in step S115.

  In step S115, the setting value is updated. Specifically, a data value corresponding to the set value is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RWM 63 (address “F0000” where “_NB_BANK” is stored). The updated set value is displayed on the set value display LED 66 by executing the interrupt process after the process of step S115.

  In step S116, the main control board 60 determines whether the operation of the start switch 34 has been detected. Specifically, the determination is made from the D6 bit (start switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 34 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined. Therefore, if it is determined in step S116 that the start switch 34 has not been operated (NO in step S116), the process returns to step S114, and if it is determined that the start switch 34 has been operated (YES in step S116), the process proceeds to step S117. Proceed to.

  After determining YES in step S114 and updating the set value in step S115, when determining NO in step S116, the process returns to step S114 again. At this time, since the D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is generated by the interrupt processing as described above, it is not updated until the next interrupt processing is executed. In other words, since the D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 is maintained at “1”, YES is determined again in step S114, and an unintended setting value Update may be performed (when the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once, the setting value is updated a plurality of times).

  For this reason, at least when YES is determined in step S114, a wait process for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, a process of waiting until one interrupt process is executed) is executed, so that the rising data of the input port 0 is obtained. The D0 bit (setting change / reset switch signal) of “_PT_IN0_UP” is set to “0”, and when the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once, it is determined that YES is determined again in step S114. To prevent. At this time, a storage area for storing the number of interrupts (“1” in the present embodiment) for executing the wait processing may be provided in the 1-byte timer storage area of FIGS.

  The method of preventing the setting value from being updated a plurality of times when the setting change / reset switch signal is operated once is not limited to the above-described method. If YES is determined in step (1), a method of forcibly setting the D0 bit of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0 to “0” can be adopted.

  In step S117, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. Specifically, the determination is made from the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” of the input port 0. If it is determined in step S117 that the setting key switch 12 has not been turned off (NO in step S117), the process of step S117 is repeated until it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off, and it is determined that the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. In this case (YES in step S117), the process proceeds to step S118.

  In step S118, the main control board 60 performs the LED display control (extinguish) after the end of the setting change. Specifically, first, data for turning off the set value display LED 66 is set. Second, data for enabling the stored number display LED 45 and the acquired number display LED 47 to be turned on is set. Thirdly, a process of changing the value of the acquired number display data to display “00” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. By performing the process of step S118, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, the set value display LED 66 is turned off, and the stored number display LED 45 and the acquired number display LED 47 can be turned on.

  Next, in step S119, as in step S107, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of the setting change. In the output request set in step S119, the control command for ending the setting change process and notifying the sub-control board 80 of the determined set value is set. Next, in step S120, the control command set 1 is executed as in step S108.

  Then, after the processing of step S120 is completed, the processing shifts to the execution of the main processing (M_MAIN). Details of the main processing are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).

  According to FIG. 29, first, in step S121, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. Then, in step S122, control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) is executed. In the control command set 2, control commands are written, and details thereof are shown in FIG.

  In the RWM 63, a storage area (not shown) of a control command buffer for storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is set. In the present embodiment, the control command data can store up to 32 commands (64 bytes).

  Next, in step S123, the execution of the interrupt processing is permitted by releasing the interrupt processing prohibited in step S121. That is, in the control command set 1, the interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of the control command set 2 in which the control command is written. Therefore, a malfunction (normal operation) due to the execution of the interrupt processing during the control command writing processing is performed. (For example, writing to an address different from the writing address) can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, an interrupt flag (not shown) for storing the inhibition / permission (release) of the interrupt processing is provided. After the interrupt flag is disabled in step S121, the main CPU 65 turns on the interrupt flag when the timing for executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms after the interrupt process is disabled) has arrived. Thereafter, the main CPU 65 clears (turns off) the interrupt flag when releasing the inhibition of the interrupt processing. As described above, when it is time to execute the interrupt processing, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, thereby determining whether to interrupt / prohibit (cancel) the interrupt processing.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET).

  According to FIG. 30, first, in step S131, the main control board 60 sets the address of the control command buffer by setting the head address of the control command buffer.

  In step S132, a write pointer is obtained. The write pointer is for designating to which address of the RWM 63 the data of the control command is to be written. In step S132, since the current write pointer is stored, the process of reading the write pointer is performed. I do.

  Next, in step S133, the designated address is obtained. More specifically, this is a process of obtaining a write destination address (designated address) of the RWM 63 from the head address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.

  Next, in step S134, data of the designated address is obtained. More specifically, based on the designated address obtained in step S133, the process reads data stored in the storage area of the RWM 63 indicated by the designated address.

  Then, in a step S135, it is determined whether or not the data of the designated address is “0” (control command <32?). When the data at the designated address is not “0”, it means that data already exists at the designated address, in other words, it means that 32 commands are set before transmission. In this case (NO in step S135), the processing of the control command set 2 ends. As a result, the data writing process is not executed, and the overwriting of the data at the specified address is prevented. On the other hand, when the data at the designated address is “0”, that is, when there is no data at the designated address (YES in step S135), the process proceeds to step S136.

  In step S136, it is determined whether the data to be written to the control command buffer is data that needs to refer to the data stored in the RWM 63 (RWM designation?). For example, the number of inserted game medals at the time of an automatic bet at the time of a replay win depends on the number of bets in the previous game and the game state in the current game, and thus corresponds to “RWM designation”. Although a detailed description of determining whether or not it corresponds to the RWM designation is omitted, specifically, for example, the determination may be made based on whether or not the D7 bit of the value stored in the D register is “0”. it can. If it is determined in step S136 that RWM is specified (YES in step S136), the process proceeds to step S138 via the process in step S137. If it is determined that RWM is not specified (NO in step S136), step S137 is performed. The process proceeds to step S138 without performing the processing of.

  In step S137, data indicating the second control command is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an E register). Specifically, data to be written as the second control command is read from the RWM 63 and stored in a predetermined register (E register).

  Then, in a step S138, data indicating the first control command is stored in the RWM 63. This is a process of storing the first control command in the “designated address” acquired in step S133, specifically, a process of storing the value of the D register stored before the execution of the control command set 2. Yes (in the case of RWM designation, a value obtained by adding “80 (H)” to the value of the D register is stored).

  Next, in step S139, data indicating the second control command is stored in the RWM 63. More specifically, in step S139, the second control command is stored at the address next to the storage destination of the first control command stored in step S138.

  Thereafter, in step S140, a process of updating the value of the write pointer by "+1" is performed. As described above, in the control command set 2, the data indicating the first control command and the data indicating the second control command are written into the storage areas of the two RWMs 63. By doubling the data of the pointer and calculating, the value of the write pointer only needs to be incremented by “1”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the output request set (step S107 in FIG. 28) and the control command set 1 (step S108 in FIG. 28) at the start of the setting change, Control command data is written to a control command buffer at a predetermined address. Then, these control command data are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by an interrupt process described later. Similarly, in the other “output request set” and “control command set 1” described in the following description, the control command data written in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing. You.

[4-1-2. Power-off recovery processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the power return process (M_POWER_ON). Note that this process may be considered as a process included in the main process.

  According to FIG. 31, in step S141, the main control board 60 returns the stack pointer. Here, restoring the stack pointer means that the data (address) of the stack pointer saved in the RWM 63 by the power-off process executed when the power-off occurs is stored in the stack pointer (SP register). Point to. Note that an area of the RWM 63 for storing data (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, and the like) at the time of power failure is referred to as a stack area, and a stack pointer is used to save data in the stack area. It may refer to a storage area (SP register) for storing data for specifying an address or data itself.

  Next, in step S142, the set value is read, and it is determined whether the set value range is within the normal range (whether the value of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is within the normal range). When it is determined in step S142 that the set value is within the normal range (YES in step S142), the process proceeds to step S143. If it is determined in step S142 that the set value is not in the normal range (NO in step S142), the process proceeds to step S152, and a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an “E6” error is performed. The details of the non-returnable error process are shown in FIG. 33. At this time, the acquired number display LED 47 indicates that an "E6" error has occurred.

  In step S143, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 63 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S144, initialization is performed on the initialization range of the RWM 63 set in step S143. Here, even in an unused area, a value may be stored in the RWM 63 due to noise or the like. If a value is stored in the unused area, the unused area may be broken, so the unused area is initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). I have.

  Next, in step S145, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 63 in step S144 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization of the RWM 63 has not been completed (NO in step S144), the process returns to step S144. When it is determined that the initialization of the RWM 63 has been completed (YES in step S144), the process proceeds to step S146.

  In step S146, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is set, and in the next step S147, the input ports 0 to 2 are read (SS_IN_READ) to read the input ports 0 to 2. Details of reading input ports 0 to 2 are shown in FIG. By performing the processing of steps S146 to S147, each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port 61 (input ports 0 to 2) before the power is turned off is updated to the latest data.

  Next, in step S148, specific information data at power-on is set. Specifically, this corresponds to a process of setting the transmission bit at the time of power-off recovery of a specific information flag (not shown) stored in the RWM 63 to “1”. Then, in step S149, the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery is set. Although a detailed description is omitted, the output time of the external signal 4 at the time of power-off recovery is a timer stored in the RWM 63, and a predetermined value (for example, “136”) is set in step S149. The timer value is decremented.

  Next, in step S150, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to the interrupt activation (step S106 in FIG. 28) in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET).

  After that, in step S151, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (that is, the value is set to “0”), the power-return processing (M_POWER_ON) is ended, and the processing returns to the processing in which the power-off occurred and restarts the processing. .

  In the above-described power restoration process, after the input ports 0 to 2 are read in step S147, the interruption process is activated in step S150. By performing such processing, the value of the RWM 63 of the input ports 0 to 2 can be updated to the latest state by performing such processing.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing reading of input ports 0 to 2 (SS_IN_READ).

  According to FIG. 32, first, in step S161, the main control board 60 sets the previous level data of the input port 0. Specifically, the address “F008” of the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD” stored in the RWM 63 is stored in the HL register (HL = F008). Then, the data at the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register.

  In step S162, the current level data of the input port 0 is input. Specifically, the data input to the input port 0 is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S163, the current input data is changed to positive logic. More specifically, the data is changed to a positive logic by an XOR operation of the data stored in the A register and the negative logic bit (11000011) of the input port 0, and the converted value is stored in the A register. .

  In the next step S164, input port 0 level data is set. More specifically, an AND operation is performed on the A register value, which is the operation result in step S163, and “1110011”, the operation result is stored in the A register, and the A register value is stored in the input port 0 level data “ _PT_IN0_OLD ”. That is, the value of the input port 0 level data is updated by the process of step S164. The reason why the AND operation with “1110011” is performed is to ensure that unused bits D4 to D6 are set to “0”.

  Next, in step S165, a door switch signal (D2 bit) is read based on the input port 0 level data set in step S164. Then, in a step S166, it is determined whether or not the door switch signal is ON (“1”). If the door switch signal is on (YES in step S166), the process proceeds to step S168. If the door switch signal is off (NO in step S166), the process proceeds to step S168 via step S167.

  In step S167, the setting key switch signal (D1 bit) and the setting change / reset switch signal (D0 bit) are cleared (set to "0").

  Then, in step S168, the current and previous change bit data are generated. Specifically, XOR operation is performed on the current input port 0 level data (A register value) and the previous input port 0 level data (B register value), and the operation result is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S169, the main control board 60 generates rising data of the input port 0. Specifically, in step S169, the following two processes are sequentially performed.

  First, an AND operation is performed on the change bit data (A register value) generated in step S168 and the value stored in the input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD” set in step S164, and the calculation result is stored in the A register. To memorize. Second, "1" is added to the value of the L register. As a result, “HL = F009”.

  Then, in step S170, the rising data of the input port 0 generated in step S169 is set. More specifically, the value stored in the A register in the first process of step S169 is stored in the address indicated by the HL register (that is, “F009”). Here, as shown in FIG. 11, since the address “F009” is a storage address of the input port 0 rising data “_PT_IN0_UP”, the rising data of the input port 0 is changed to the input port 0 by the processing of steps S169 to S170. 0 rising data is stored as “_PT_IN0_UP”.

  By performing the processing up to step S170 in this manner, the level data and the rising data are read from the input port 0.

  Next, in step S171, the address of the RWM 63 in which the level data of the next input port is stored is set. Specifically, "1" is added to the value of the L register. As a result, “HL = F00A”. This address “F00A” is the storage address of the input port 1 level data “_PT_IN1_OLD” as shown in FIG.

  In steps S172 to S175, the same processing as that performed in steps S161 to S164 for the input port 0 is performed for the input port 1, thereby setting the input port 1 level data “_PT_IN1_OLD”. The description of each process is omitted because it is repeated.

  In steps S176 to S178, the same processing as that performed in steps S168 to S170 for the input port 0 is performed for the input port 1, thereby setting the input port 1 rise data "_PT_IN1_UP". The description of each process is omitted because it is repeated.

  As described above, by performing the processes of steps S172 to S178, the level data and the rising data are read from the input port 1.

  Further, in step S179, as in step S171, the address of the RWM 63 storing the level data of the next input port is set. Specifically, "1" is added to the value of the L register. As a result, “HL = F00C”. This address “F00C” is the storage address of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” as shown in FIG.

  Since the storage address of the input port 2 level data is set in the HL register by step S179, the same processing as steps S172 to S178 performed for input port 1 is performed for input port 2 in subsequent steps S180 to S185. Will be As a result, the level data and the rising data of the input port 2 are read.

  Then, when the process of step S185 is performed, the process of reading the input ports 0 to 2 (SS_IN_READ) ends.

[4-1-3. Unrecoverable error processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP).

First, in the present embodiment, as an example, it is determined that a non-recoverable error occurs in the following cases. However, the non-recoverable error is not limited to these.
E1 error: When it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is not normal at the start of the program (M_PRG_START) (step S23 in FIG. 27).
E5 error: when it is determined that a display error has occurred in the main processing (M_MAIN) (step S52 in FIG. 34).
E6 error: When it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range in the power return process (M_POWER_ON) (step S152 in FIG. 31).
E7 error: When it is determined that a random number error has occurred in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) (step S79 in FIG. 55).

  When the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, the setting is changed (the setting key switch 12 is turned on under the condition where the power is turned off and the power is turned off, and the power is turned on under the condition, By turning on the start switch 34 and then turning off the setting key switch 12), the main process (M_MAIN) can be executed, and the unrecoverable error can be canceled by such an operation.

  According to FIG. 33, in step S191, the main control board 60 prohibits the interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S121 in FIG. 29, and controls so that an interrupt is not generated even if an interrupt request signal (INT signal) is input. By prohibiting the interrupt processing, it is possible to prevent the update, input / output, etc. of various data stored in the RWM 63 from being executed by the interrupt processing, and to transmit erroneous information to the sub-control board 80 or to prevent the external terminal board 100 , And transmission to the hall computer 200.

  In step S192, all output ports 62 (for example, output ports 0 to 6) are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” (“00000000B”) are output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6 for each output port. In step S193, the next output port address is set. That is, “+1” is added to the address indicating the output port.

  Next, in step S194, it is determined whether or not all output ports have been completed, that is, whether or not output port 6 has been completed. If it is determined that the output ports have not been completed (NO in step S194), step S192 is performed. When it is determined that the process has been completed (YES in step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

  As described above, by turning off all the output ports 62 (output ports 0 to 6) by the processing up to step S194, the active signal output before the processing is executed is turned off. This can prevent the burn-in of the LED, the burn-in of the motor 40, and the swallowing of game medals.

  For example, if the power is cut off while the blocker signal is being output (the blocker signal is ON), the blocker 29 remains in the ON state (permitted position) unless this processing is executed, thereby detecting the game medal. Although the processing does not occur, the state in which the game medal passage of the permission state is formed continues, and swallowing of the game medal occurs.

  Further, for example, when the power is cut off in a situation where the motor 40 outputs φ1 (the φ1 signal of the reel motor is ON), unless the process is executed, the output of φ1 is continued until a reset signal is input. Become. Normally, the time until the reset signal is input is short, but when the power supply voltage drops momentarily, the power-off processing is executed, and when the normal power supply voltage is supplied, the reset signal is input. The reset wait is repeated without being performed. Therefore, a situation in which φ1 is continuously output may occur.

  In step S195, lower digits are set as error display data. Next, in step S196, the upper digit is set as error display data.

  Then, in step S197, the LED is turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000B” to the address indicating the output port 0. Therefore, at the time of step S197, the outputs of all the LEDs are “0” (turn off). Thereby, flickering of the LED can be prevented.

  Next, in step S198, a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 1 is performed (error display output). This is a process for displaying “E1”, “E5”, “E6”, “E7”, etc. as error display contents.

  Next, in step S199, the LED is turned on. This process is a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 0. Then, in a step S200, it is determined whether or not the display weight has ended. Specifically, the display weight is a process of subtracting “−1” from the value of the B register and determining whether the value of the B register has become “0”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “255” is set as the B register value at the start of the process of step S198. Then, the subtraction process is performed until the B register value becomes “0”. In this embodiment, the internal system clock is 16 MHz, which is approximately 0.128 ms (“1 / internal system clock (16 MHz)” × 256 × 8 (instructions) + α (other instructions) ≒ 0.128 ms), and The register value is set so as to change from “255” to “0”.

  If it is determined in step S200 that the display weight has not ended (NO in step S200), the processing in step S200 is repeated until the end of the display weight is determined (until the B register value becomes “0”). Then, when it is determined in step S200 that the display weight has ended (YES in step S200), the process proceeds to step S201, and switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S197.

  By switching between the upper digit and the lower digit in step S201 and returning to step S197, the display of the lower digit can be switched to the display of the upper digit by the same program processing. The switching period of the upper digit / lower digit is about 0.128 ms. Therefore, after the upper digit is turned on for 0.128 ms, the process of turning on the lower digit for 0.128 ms is repeated.

  For example, when the error of “E1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the processing of the above-described steps S197 to S201, “E” is displayed in the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 47 for about 0.128 ms (in the meantime, The lower digit of the acquired number display LED 47 is turned off), and then "1" is displayed in the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 47 for about 0.128 ms (during this time, the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 47 is turned off).

  Further, the switching period of the upper digit / lower digit is earlier than the timer interrupt period (2.235 ms), and the luminance at the time of error display is increased. In other words, when an error is displayed using the LED, the luminance of the non-recoverable error is higher than that of the normal error. Therefore, the devices (the effect lamp 19, the speaker 20, the image display device 21) on the sub control board 80 side Even if error notification using () is not performed (or not), the hall clerk can easily notice.

  By performing the non-recoverable error processing as described above, even if an error occurs during a period in which the timer interrupt processing is not executed (or not to be executed), the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration are performed. Indication of an error can be performed using the LED appropriately.

  In the present embodiment, the display weight processing (step S200) is provided as described above. However, even if the display weight processing is not provided, the non-recoverable error processing can be performed. In this case, since the upper digit and the lower digit are switched at high speed on the software, the processing time in steps S197 to S201 becomes substantially "0", and the switching between the upper digit display and the lower digit display is performed by a program. And the response speed of the LED. If a wait time of about 0.1 ms is provided as described above, one of the LEDs continues to be lit during the wait time, so that a certain brightness (luminous flux) of the LED can be secured. On the other hand, if a recent high-performance LED is employed, it is possible to secure sufficient brightness for visual observation even if the lighting time is momentary (only step S199).

[4-2. Main processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN). 35 to 54 show a subroutine during the main process. Further, as described above, during the main process, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed at predetermined intervals (2.235 ms).

  According to FIG. 34, first, in step S31, the main control board 60 sets a stack pointer. Here, the processing is to store F200 (H) in the stack pointer (SP register).

  Next, in step S32, a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) is executed. The details of the game start set are shown in FIG. 35. After the execution of the game start set, the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S33. Details of the start of the medal acceptance are shown in FIG.

  In step S33, game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) is executed. This process is a process of reading the number of game medals bet (the number of bets) at the present time, and is different from the process of reading the number of stored medals. Details of the game medal reading are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S34, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S33. The presence or absence of a bet medal can be determined by the value of the “zero flag” set in the game medal reading process.

  Here, the “zero flag” is a flag for determining whether or not the operation result is “0”, and indicates a specific bit of a flag register (for example, an F register) provided in the MPU. When the specific bit is “0” (that is, the zero flag is “0”), it indicates that the operation result is not “0”. When the specific bit is “1” (that is, the zero flag is “1”), , Indicates that the operation result is “0”.

  Here, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, in reading the game medals, the value (the number of bets) read from the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register), and the A register Is a value indicating "0" (that is, when there is no bet medal), the zero flag is set to "1". On the other hand, if the register value of the A register indicates a value other than “0” (that is, if there is a bet medal), the zero flag is set to “0”. Therefore, in step S34, the presence or absence of a bet medal can be determined based on whether the zero flag is "0" or "1".

  When it is determined in step S34 that there is a bet medal (zero flag = "0") (YES in step S34), the process proceeds to step S36. If it is determined in step S34 that there is no bet medal (zero flag = “1”) (NO in step S34), the process proceeds to step S35, waits for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP), and then proceeds to step S36. Details of waiting for medal insertion are shown in FIG.

  In step S36, the main control board 60 executes medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). The medal management is a process for managing the inserted game medals, and details thereof are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S37, the main control board 60 performs a process of updating the soft random numbers. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1") a random number for processing (calculation processing) to a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 69. The soft random number is, for example, a 16-bit random number having a range from “0” to “65535”. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to a value before the update may be executed.

  In the next step S38, the main control board 60 executes a start switch check (M_START_CHK), and sets / clears a reception permission flag of the start switch 34. Details of the start switch check are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S39, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 34 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 34 has been operated (YES in step S39), the process proceeds to step S40, and when it is determined that the start switch 34 has not been operated (NO in step S39), the process returns to step S33. If it is determined in step S39 that the start switch 34 has been operated, the start switch reception permission flag is set in step S38 (the D0 bit (start switch reception state) of the game medal management flag "_FL_MEDAL_STS" is set to " 1 (permitted) ").

  Then, in step S40, the main control board 60 executes start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL). Details of accepting the start switch are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S41, the main control board 60 (role lottery means 69) executes the lottery of the role at the timing when the start switch 34 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 34 is received. The random number value at the time of the lottery lottery is obtained in the start switch acceptance executed in step S40 (see step S491 in FIG. 53). Then, in step S41, the main control board 60 (role lottery means 69) determines whether or not the acquired random number value is a random number value corresponding to any of the winning combinations, by using the role lottery table.

  Next, in step S42, the main control board 60 (reel control means 70) starts rotating the reel 39.

  In step S43, it is checked whether the reel 39 has been stopped. Specifically, it detects whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 35 is received, and when the operation signal is received, determines the stop position of the reel 39 based on the result of the lottery of the winning combination and the position of the reel 39. , The reel 39 is controlled to stop at the determined stop position.

  Next, in step S44, the main control board 60 (reel control means 70) checks whether or not all the reels 39 have stopped, and determines in step S45 whether or not all the reels 39 have stopped. If it is determined in step S45 that all the reels 39 have stopped (YES in step S45), the process proceeds to step S46. If it is determined that at least one of the reels 39 has not stopped (NO in step S45), the process proceeds to step S46. It returns to S43.

  In step S46, the main control board 60 (display determination means 71) makes a display determination of the symbol. Specifically, the display determination means 71 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has stopped in the activated line, and updates the symbol combination flag (not shown) according to the combination of the stopped symbols. I do.

  In step S46, the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” (not shown) is also updated. For example, when one winning combination wins and the game medal payout number data is “0”, the data value is updated from “0” to “1”.

  Next, in step S47, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. Specifically, it is determined that a symbol display error (symbol combination error) has occurred when a symbol (a kick symbol) that should not be displayed is displayed on the payline. If it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred (YES in step S47), the process proceeds to step S52 to execute a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an “E5” error. On the other hand, when it is determined that no symbol display error has occurred (NO in step S47), the process proceeds to step S48.

  In order to cancel the “unrecoverable error” when it occurs, it is necessary to turn on / off the power and reset the set value. For example, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise (the setting key switch 12 is turned on), and the power is turned on. Thereby, the predetermined range (set value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 63 is cleared. Then, the set value is reset, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.

  On the other hand, when a "recoverable error" such as a full error described later occurs, the error content is displayed and the processing is stopped, but there is no need to turn on / off the power or reset the set values. For example, when a hall clerk executes an error clearing operation (removes the cause of the error) and operates the setting change / reset switch 13, it is determined whether or not the error has been cleared, and when it is determined that the error has been cleared, Then, the stopped processing is restarted.

  In step S48, the main control board 60 (payout means 72) executes medal payout by winning (MS_WIN_PAY), and pays out game medals corresponding to the winning combination. Details of the medal payout by winning are shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in step S49, the main control board 60 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK). Although detailed description is omitted, the game end check processing clears the condition device flag and the replay operation state flag, turns off the replay display LED (the state display LED 48a), manages the bonus operation, and the like. Further, in the game end check processing, processing such as judging a full detection signal by a full sensor and displaying a full error (“FE” error) when the signal is on may be performed. When the process in step S49 ends, the process proceeds to step S50.

  In step S50, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the time of ending the game. This process is a process of setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.

  Then, in the next step S51, the main control board 60 stores the control command data to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 by executing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET).

  When the process of step S51 ends, the main process of one game ends, so the main control board 60 returns to step S30 and performs the main process of the next game. The above is the main processing procedure (main routine) of the main processing.

  Hereinafter, a subroutine during the main processing will be described with reference to FIGS.

[4-2-1. Game start set]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a game start set (MS_GAME_SET). The "game start set" is a subroutine executed in step S32 in the main process shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 35, first, in step S211, the main control board 60 sets a game standby display time. In the present embodiment, a “26846” interrupt ($ 60000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds) is set as the game standby display time.

  When the game standby display time is set in step S211, the number of interrupts is counted (subtracted) from this point. When the game standby display time becomes “0”, in the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) (see step S35 of FIG. 34, see FIG. 41), the game medal payout number data is cleared (the data of “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is “0”). To be). As a result, “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is "9" and the player has settled the game by operating the adjustment switch 36 and ended the game, about one minute after the game standby display time has elapsed. Is displayed as "00" (or "* 0", "**", etc. ("*" means turned off)). This has the effect that the number of empty spaces can be reduced by allowing the clerk of the hall or another player to recognize them as empty spaces.

  After the processing in step S211, the processing in step S212 is performed. Here, the processing of steps S212 to S217 is processing for setting the state before the game is started, based on the result of the previous game, at the time of a replay operation or a single type BB game.

  First, in step S212, the main control board 60 acquires data of a symbol combination display flag (symbol flag) (not shown). Specifically, the combination of the symbols on the activated line after the stop of the reel 39 in the previous game, that is, the data on the winning combination is stored in the register from the symbol combination display flag stored in the RWM 63.

  In the next step S213, an operation state flag "_FL_ACTION" is generated. Then, in step S214, the operation state flag is updated and stored. For example, when winning a replay, in step S213, an operation state flag related to replay is generated based on the data stored in step S212. Then, in step S214, the D0 bit of the operation state flag "_FL_ACTION" is set to "1 (operation)", and the operation state flag is stored (stored).

  In the next step S215, based on the data of the symbol flag acquired in step S212, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols of the replay has been displayed (whether or not the replay has won). If it is determined that the replay symbol combination has been displayed (YES in step S215), the process proceeds to step S216, and if it is determined that the symbol combination is not displayed (NO in step S215), the process proceeds to step S218.

  In step S216, the main control board 60 executes game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). This process is a process of reading the number of game medals (the number of bets) bet in the previous game in which the replay has been won. Details of the game medal reading are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S217, automatic bet amount data is set. This processing updates the data “_NB_REP_MEDAL” (not shown) of the RWM 63 that stores the number of game medals to be automatically bet (the number of automatic bets) based on the number of bets of the last game (replay winning game) read in step S216. Processing.

  After the state based on the result of the previous game is set by the processing of the above-mentioned S212 to S217, the processing related to the game state is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by performing the processing of step S218 and step S219.

  In step S218, an output request for an operating state is set. Then, in a step S219, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed. Specifically, for example, information indicating that the replay has been activated or the type 1 BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. In the processing of steps S218 to S219, in addition to the above-described information, information on the set value of the current game, information on the RT state of the current game, and the like may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  Then, after the process of step S219, the process proceeds to step S220, and a medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) is executed. Details of the start of the medal acceptance are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ).

  According to FIG. 36, in step S221, the main control board 60 reads the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in the RWM 63, and stores the read value in a predetermined register (for example, an A register). As described above with reference to FIG. 16, this value is the number of game medals bet (the number of bets).

  Then, in step S222, the main control board 60 checks the number of medals (the number of bets) stored in step S221. Specifically, if the register value of the A register indicates “0” (that is, if there is no bet medal), the zero flag is set to “1”. On the other hand, if the register value of the A register indicates a value other than “0” (that is, if there is a bet medal), the zero flag is set to “0”.

  When the process of step S222 ends, the main control board 60 ends the game medal reading.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the start of medal reception (MS_MEDAL_START).

  According to FIG. 37, first, in step S231, the main control board 60 clears the data of the bet number in the previous game by setting the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” to “0”.

  Next, in step S232, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning off the input display LEDs (the status display LEDs 48e to 48g). Specifically, the D5 to D7 bits of the insertion number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” are set to “0”.

  In the next step S233, the main control board 60 initializes the game medal management flag. Specifically, the D0, D2 to D4, D6, and D7 bits of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” are set to “0”.

  In the next step S234, the main control board 60 checks the operation state flag. Specifically, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” is read. Then, in a step S235, it is determined whether or not the replaying operation is being performed based on the reading in the step S234.

  If the value of the D0 bit read in step S234 is "0 (not activated)", it is determined in step S235 that the replay operation is not being performed (NO in step S235), and the process proceeds to step S246. In step S246, blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position), and thereafter, the process of starting the medal acceptance is ended. Therefore, when the re-game is not activated, the blocker 29 is turned on, so that the maintenance of the game medals is uniformly permitted. The details of the blocker ON are shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the value of the D0 bit read in step S234 is "1 (operation)", it is determined in step S235 that a replay operation has been performed (YES in step S235), and the flow advances to step S236. That is, at the start of the medal acceptance shown in FIG. 37, the processing after step S236 corresponds to the automatic bet processing of the game medals during the re-game operation.

  In step S236, a standby time at the time of the replay operation is set. In step S237, a wait process is performed. Specifically, for example, in order to set the wait time to about 500 ms, a count value “237” of the number of interrupts is set, and the count value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt, until the count value becomes “0”. Execute weight processing.

  By providing the wait processing in step S237, it is possible to prevent the turning on of the replay display LED (step S241) and the automatic betting of game medals (step S244) from being performed immediately after the end of the game. Since the betting sound at the time of the automatic betting is output based on the command stored in steps S242 and S243, the output timing of the betting sound can also be adjusted by the wait processing in step S237. Further, the wait time may be made different depending on the type of the winning replay.

  Although not shown in FIG. 15 or the like, the RWM 63 stores the maximum value of the number of interrupts counted in the wait processing (for example, “237”) in the 1-byte timer storage area in order to execute the wait processing in step S237. May be provided with a 1-byte storage area for storing. When the maximum value of the number of interrupts counted in the wait processing exceeds “255” (for example, “300”), the data cannot be stored in the 1-byte storage area, and the RWM 63 stores “300” in the 2-byte timer storage area. . May be provided in a 2-byte storage area.

  After the end of the wait processing in step S237, in step S238, the main control board 60 executes the reading of the number of stored medals (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the number of stored game medals (the number of stored medals). Details of reading the stored number of sheets are shown in FIG.

  Then, in a step S239, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets read in the step S238 has reached a limit number (50 in the present embodiment). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” obtained by reading the stored number of sheets in step S238 is a value indicating the limit number of “50”.

  When it is determined in step S239 that the stored number is the limit number (YES in step S239), the process proceeds to step S241. At this time, the blocker 29 is maintained in the OFF state (non-permitted position).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S239 that the stored number is not the limit number (NO in step S239), the process proceeds to step S240, and the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) is executed to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position). Then, the process proceeds to step S241. That is, when it is determined that the stored number is not the limit number, the maintenance of the game medals is permitted even during the re-game operation. If it is desired that the game medal is not always maintained during the re-game operation, the processes of steps S238 to S240 may be deleted.

  Then, in step S241, lighting processing of the replay display LED (status display LED 48a) is performed. Specifically, the D3 bit of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “1 (light)”. The process of actually turning on the replay display LED is performed by LED display control in an interrupt process described later (step S65 in FIG. 55).

  Then, in step S242, the main control board 60 performs an output request setting process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made to the sub control board 80, and in step S243, the control command set 1 ( R_CMD_SET).

  Thereafter, in step S244, the main control board 60 executes one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC). The addition of one medal is a process of adding one game medal, but here means a process of automatically betting (adding) one game medal at a time for an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Details of the one-medal addition are shown in FIG.

  Then, in the next step S245, it is determined whether or not the number of bets bet in step S244 has reached a predetermined limit number (specified number). Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the D7 bit “gaming medal limit determination” of the gaming medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is “1 (limit)”. When it is determined that the number of bets has not reached the predetermined limit number (NO in step S245), the process returns to step S244 to execute one medal addition (automatic bet) again. Then, when it is determined that the bet number has reached the predetermined limit number (YES in step S245), the medal receiving process ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  In FIG. 37, the automatic betting process (steps S244 to S245) is performed after the output request set for automatic betting (step S242) and the command transmission for automatic betting (step S243) are executed. The mode is not limited to this. For example, after the automatic betting process is completed, an output request set for automatic betting and command transmission for automatic betting may be transmitted.

  In FIG. 37, in order to automatically bet, for example, three game medals at once at the time of a replay prize, a wait process is not provided every time one game medal is added in the automatic bet. However, NO is determined in step S245. After that, a weight process may be added. In this case, since the addition of one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC) in step S244 is performed with a wait time interposed therebetween, the insertion number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” is sequentially updated, and the insertion display LED (status display LED 48g, The status display LED 48f and the status display LED 48e) can be shown to the player so as to be sequentially turned on.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing reading of the stored number of sheets (R_CREDIT_READ).

  According to FIG. 38, first, in step S251, the main control board 60 reads the stored number data. Specifically, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stored in the RWM 63 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an A register).

  Next, in step S252, the main control board 60 performs a zero check on the value read in step S251. Specifically, when the value of the A register indicates “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”. Then, after the processing of step S252, the processing of reading the stored number of sheets is completed.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON).

  According to FIG. 39, first, in step S261, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” has elapsed. Specifically, when the timer value of the blocker OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” stored at the address “F026” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed. In step S261, while it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker OFF has not elapsed (NO at step S261), it is not possible to proceed to the next process, and it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker OFF has elapsed. (YES in step S261), the process proceeds to step S262.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 15, “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” is the rising edge of the “selector passage sensor signal” indicating that the passage sensor 28 is turned on by the detection of the game medal (input port 2 rising data “ When the D7 bit of _PT_IN2_UP becomes “1”, the initial value “144” is set, and thereafter, it is a 1-byte timer that decrements “1” by one for each interrupt. Therefore, until the 144 interrupt (about 322 ms) elapses and the timer value of “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” becomes “0”, the processing after step S262 cannot be performed.

  By performing such control, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment can prevent the "blocking of game medals" by the blocker 29. More specifically, the blocker 29 is configured to be displaced from the OFF state (non-permitted position) to the ON state (permitted position) immediately after a game medal is detected by the path sensor 28 (selector path sensor 28). Therefore, there is a possibility that a so-called "game medal pinch" may occur, in which a game medal flowing down the game medal path is pinched by the blocker 29. With respect to such a problem, in the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) of the present embodiment, a sufficient time is required for the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (M_BLOCKER_ON). More specifically, a timer for the blocker OFF monitoring time (about 322 ms) is set as a time sufficient to reach a predetermined position where the flow to the hopper 50 is determined beyond the position of the blocker 29) and the timer value is set. By not permitting the blocker 29 to change from the OFF state to the ON state until is set to “0”, “sandwiching of game medals” can be prevented.

  Since the blocker OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” is a timer stored at the predetermined address “F026” of the RWM 63, the game can proceed even after the initial value is set in the timer.

  Next, in step S262, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption by interruption processing (timer interruption processing) (interruption prohibition). As described above, during the execution of the main processing, the timer interrupt processing is performed every 2.235 ms. After the execution of the interrupt inhibition in step S262, a period until the interrupt inhibition is released in step S266 described later. , So that interrupts are not permitted.

  Then, in step S263, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning on the blocker signal. Specifically, the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” stored at the address “F061” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (ON)”. The blocker signal set to ON in step S263 is not immediately output from the output port 62 (more specifically, the output port 3), but is output from the output port 3 by an interrupt process executed thereafter. .

  Next, in step S264, the main control board 60 clears the value of the insertion monitoring counter. Specifically, the data of the input monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK” stored at the address “F016” of the RWM 63 is set to “0”. As described above, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is “+1” when a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and the value is “−1” when the game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 30 (the insertion sensor 30a and the insertion sensor 30b). Is a counter that repeats “+1” and “0” when it is normal. Here, for example, when a game medal is inserted when the blocker 29 is in the OFF state, only the detection by the passage sensor 28 is performed (the game medal is not guided to the insertion sensor 30 side). The counter value keeps rising. This situation can be reset by clearing the value of the input monitoring counter in step S264.

  Next, in step S265, the main control board 60 turns on the flag indicating the blocker state. Specifically, the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (ON)”. Note that the blocker state of “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is information indicating that a game medal can be inserted, unlike the blocker signal of “_PT_BLK_HPM”, and interrupt processing is performed when the data is “1”. By performing the control, control is performed so as to turn on the insertion enable display LED (the status display LED 48b).

  After the process up to step S265 is completed, in step S266, the main control board 60 releases the interrupt prohibition performed in step S262, thereby allowing the interrupt by the interrupt process (timer interrupt process), and turning on the blocker ON process. finish.

  By prohibiting the interrupt during the period from step S262 to S266 as described above, it is possible to control so that the timer interrupt process is not executed during the execution of the instruction (update of the RWM 63) executed during the period. As a result, an interrupt for controlling the state of the blocker 29 (transition from the non-permitted position to the permitted position) based on the blocker signal set in step S263, and a closing enable LED based on the blocker state set in step S265. Is executed by the same interrupt processing. That is, since the position control of the blocker 29 and the lighting control of the insertion possible display LED are realized by the interrupt processing at the same timing, the OFF state / ON state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the insertion possible display LED are changed. The occurrence of inconsistency can be prevented, and an effect of preventing confusion for the player can be expected.

  Note that each process of steps S263 to S265 in FIG. 39 is called prevention of inconsistency between the above-described state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the insertion enable display LED (ensure consistency) even if the execution order is appropriately changed. The effect can be obtained.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC).
The one-medal addition process shown in FIG. 40 is commonly used in each bet process, such as at the time of betting on a game medal, at the time of an automatic bet based on the display of replay, and at the time of a stored bet based on the operation of the bet switch 33. Processing. Even if the betting processes to be executed are different, the program capacity can be reduced by using a common process (program).

  According to FIG. 40, first, in step S271, the main control board 60 reads the number of betting game medals (the number of bets). Specifically, the game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) described with reference to FIG. 36 is executed. By this processing, the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" stored at the address "F06D" of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  In the next step S272, the number of bets of the game medals read in step S271 is incremented by "+1" and stored in the C register. Specifically, “1” is added to the A register value, and the A register value after the addition is stored (updated) in the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL”.

  Then, in step S273, the main control board 60 performs a process for clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47. Specifically, the acquired number display data “_NB_PAY_LED” (not shown) stored in the RWM 63 is cleared. The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 47 is performed by the LED display control (step S65 in FIG. 55) in the interrupt process.

  Next, in step S274, the main control board 60 generates lighting data of the input display LEDs (the status display LED 48g, the status display LED 48f, and the status display LED 48e). The generation of the lighting data is executed, for example, by calculating the value of the A register.

  In the next step S275, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the generation of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed. When it is determined that the generation of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has not been completed (NO in step S275), the process returns to step S24, and the generation of the lighting data is continued. When it is determined that the generation of the lighting data for the inserted number has been completed (YES in step S275), the process proceeds to step S276.

  In step S276, the main control board 60 performs control to store the lighting data of the insertion number display LED in the RWM 63. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the input number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED”. The process of actually turning on the insertion number display LED is performed by the LED display control (step S65 in FIG. 55) in the interrupt process.

  Then, in step S277, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number. Here, the medal limit number means the maximum value of the number of game medals that can be bet in the game (or the number of game medals that must be bet in the game), that is, the “specified number”. For example, assuming that a maximum of three game medals can be bet in a normal game and a maximum of two game medals can be bet in a single type BB game, the medal limit number in the normal game is “3” and the type BB game is one. The medal limit number in the middle is “2”.

  Next, in step S278, the main control board 60 executes game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) and reads the bet number. This process is the same as the process in step S271.

  Then, in a step S279, it is determined whether or not the bet number read in the step S278 is the game medal limit number set in the step S277. When it is determined that the number of bets is not the game medal limit number (NO in step S279), the processing of this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the game medal limit number (YES in step S279), the process proceeds to step S280, and a medal limit flag (game medal limit determination) is set. In step S280, specifically, “1 (limit)” is stored in the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63. After the processing in step S280, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

[4-2-2. Waiting for medal insertion]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP). "Medal insertion wait" is a subroutine executed in step S35 in the main process shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 41, first, in step S281, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the input port 0 rising data “_PT_IN0_UP” is “1”. If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S281), and the process proceeds to step S282. If the D1 bit is “0”, it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not ON (NO in step S281), and the process proceeds to step S291.

  That is, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on (for example, while the setting key is being inserted) in the waiting state for inserting a game medal, the setting confirmation mode is set, and the processing of steps S282 to S290 is executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the current setting value (visual confirmation by the administrator), and cannot change the setting value.

  In the present embodiment, since the determination in step S281 is made based on the rising data of the setting key switch 12 (the rising data of the input port 0), for example, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on during the game, Even if the determination in step S281 is made, since the rising data is OFF, the process does not shift to the setting confirmation mode after step S282. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed. When such a point is not taken into consideration, data indicating ON / OFF of the setting key switch 12 (specifically, D1 (setting key switch signal) of input port 0 level data “_PT_IN0_OLD”) is used. The determination in step S281 (and step S286 described later) may be performed.

  In step S282, blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) is executed as a process for controlling the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permitted position). When the blocker 29 is turned off, game medals are returned from the payout port 53 even if they are inserted through the game medal insertion slot 26. Details of the blocker OFF are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S283, the main control board 60 performs an output request setting process for transmitting a control command at the start of setting value display to the sub-control board 80. In the next step S284, the control command set 1 ( R_CMD_SET).

  Next, in step S285, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning on the set value display LED 66. By this processing, the set value display LED 66 can be turned on, and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 66 is performed by the LED display control (step S65 in FIG. 55) in the interrupt process.

  In the next step S286, the main control board 60 continues to determine whether or not the setting key switch signal has been turned off. In step S286, it is determined whether the D1 bit (setting key switch signal) of the falling data of the input port 0 (not shown) has become “1”. While the D1 bit is “0”, it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not turned off (is turned on) (NO in step S286), and the process of step S286 is repeated. Then, when the D1 bit becomes “1”, it is determined that the setting key switch signal has been turned off (YES in step S286), and the process proceeds to step S287.

  Then, in step S287, the main control board 60 executes a process of turning off the set value display LED 66. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S288.

  In step S288, the main control board 60 performs an output request set process for transmitting a control command at the end of setting value display to the sub control board 80. In the next step S289, the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) Execute

  In the next step S290, the main control board 60 executes blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON) to control the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position).

  Next, in step S291, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game standby display time has elapsed (confirmation of the start of the game standby display). Specifically, by determining whether or not the value of the game standby display start time “_TM2_BACK_OFF” is “0”, “_TM2_BACK_OFF” is set in step S211 of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the interruption for "26846" (about 60 seconds) has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the game standby display time has elapsed (YES in step S291), the process advances to step S292 to execute processing for clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47, and then ends this flowchart processing. Then, the processing returns to the main processing. The processing in step S292 is the same as the processing in step S273 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S291 that the game standby display time has not elapsed (NO in step S291), the process of the present flowchart is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, according to the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) of the present embodiment, if the game has not been played for a predetermined time (the game standby display time, about 60 seconds), the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is performed. Is cleared, but the display of the replay display LED (status display LED 48a), the stored number display LED 45, and the insertion display LED (status display LED 48e to status display LED 48g) is controlled not to be cleared. With such control, even if the game is not performed and the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared after the predetermined time has elapsed and the information regarding the continuation of the game is continuously displayed, the case where the player once leaves the seat However, it is possible to prevent another player or a person in charge of the hall from misunderstanding that the game has been completely completed, thereby suppressing a disadvantage to the player.

  Also, the fact that the game medal has been acquired in the previous game is continuously displayed on the acquired number display LED 47, even if the player finishes the game (executs the settlement process and leaves the seat), the other player will not be able to play. It is not preferable because there is a possibility that the player or the person in charge of the hall does not feel the end of the game (feels that he may still play the game). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, examples of other situations in which the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared include, for example, step S211 (see FIG. 35) of the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) and step S292 of waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP). (See FIG. 41). In these cases, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when about 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared (displayed as “00”). By such control, for example, when the reels 39 are rotating (instruction function is not operating) or when all reels 39 are stopped, the winning combination is not displayed (regardless of whether or not the winning of the role is performed). The display of the LED 47 is “00” (or “* 0” or “**” or the like (“*” means turn off)).

  Also, in step S273 (see FIG. 40) of one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC), the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared. In this case, the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is cleared when a game medal is inserted (insertion of a bet medal, maintenance of a game medal, automatic betting at the time of a replay winning).

  In the present embodiment, the above control regarding clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 47 is only an example. For example, when the reels 39 are rotating, when all the reels 39 are stopped, when a winning combination is not won, or when a game medal is At the time of insertion, nothing may be displayed on the acquired number display LED 47.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). In the blocker OFF process, after the game medal is enabled, if the game medal cannot be serviced (cannot be accepted), the blocker 29 is turned off (non-permitted position) and the game medal is inserted. Control is performed so as to form a “non-permitted game medal path” in which game medals maintained through the mouth 26 are returned from the payout opening 53.

  According to FIG. 42, first, in step S301, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker signal is OFF. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is “0 (OFF)”.

  When the value of the blocker signal is “1” in step S301, it is determined that the blocker signal is not OFF (NO in step S301), and the process proceeds to step S302. On the other hand, when the value of the blocker signal is “0”, it is determined that the blocker signal is OFF (YES in step S301), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S302, the main control board 60 prohibits the interruption by the interruption process (timer interruption process) (interruption prohibition). As described above, the timer interrupt processing is performed every 2.235 ms during the execution of the main processing. However, after the execution of the interrupt prohibition in step S302, a period until the interrupt prohibition is released in step S305 described later. , So that interrupts are not permitted.

  Then, in step S303, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning off the blocker signal. Specifically, the blocker signal and the D6 bit (blocker signal) of the hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” stored at the address “F061” of the RWM 63 are set to “0 (OFF)”. The blocker signal set to OFF in step S303 is not immediately output from the output port 62 (more specifically, the output port 3), but is output from the output port 3 by an interrupt process executed thereafter. .

  Next, in step S304, the main control board 60 turns off the flag indicating the blocker state. Specifically, the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “0 (OFF)”. Note that the blocker state of “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is different from the blocker signal of “_PT_BLK_HPM”, and is information indicating that a game medal can be inserted. When the data is “0”, an interrupt process is performed. By performing this, control is performed so as to turn off the insertion enable display LED (the status display PLED 48b).

  When the processing up to step S304 is completed, in step S305, the main control board 60 releases the interrupt prohibition performed in step S302, thereby permitting the interruption by the interruption processing (timer interruption processing), and executing the blocker OFF processing. finish.

  By prohibiting the interrupt during the period from step S302 to S305 as described above, it is possible to control so that the timer interrupt process is not executed during execution of the instruction (update of the RWM 63) executed during the period. As a result, an interrupt for controlling the state of the blocker 29 (transition from the permitted position to the non-permitted position) based on the blocker signal set in step S303, and a closing enable LED based on the blocker state set in step S304. And the interrupt for turning off the light is executed by the same interrupt processing. That is, since the position control of the blocker 29 and the turning-off control of the insertion enable display LED are realized by the interrupt processing at the same timing, the OFF state / ON state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the insertion enable display LED are changed. The occurrence of inconsistency can be prevented, and an effect of preventing confusion for the player can be expected.

  In addition, even if the order of execution of the steps S303 and S304 in FIG. 42 is changed, the above-described effect of preventing inconsistency between the state of the blocker 29 and the display state of the insertion enable display LED (to ensure consistency). Can be obtained.

[4-2-3. Medal management]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK). "Medal management" is a subroutine executed in step S36 in the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 43, first, in step S311, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (blocker state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is “1 (ON)”. The fact that the D2 bit is “1” means that the blocker 29 has formed a game medal passage in the permitted state. If the D2 bit is "1" in step S311, it is determined that the blocker signal is ON (YES in step S311), and the process proceeds to step S312. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is “0 (OFF)”, it is determined that the blocker signal is not ON (NO in step S311), and the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S312, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the input sensor signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the D5 bit (the closing sensor 2 signal) or the D6 bit (the closing sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”.

  If either the D5 bit or the D6 bit of “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1” in step S312, it is determined that the insertion sensor signal is ON (YES in step S312), which means that the game medal is to be inserted. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S321 to perform a maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) to perform a maintenance check process. Details of the maintenance medal check are shown in FIGS. 44 and 45.

  If both the D5 bit and the D6 bit of “_PT_IN2_OLD” are “0” in step S312, it is determined that the closing sensor signal is not ON (NO in step S312), and the process proceeds to step S313.

  In step S313, the main control board 60 checks whether it is possible to accept the bet operation by the bet switch 33 (the 1-bet switch 33a and the 3-bet switch 33b) and to accept the settlement operation by the settlement switch 36. Set request. Then, in the next step S314, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.

  Next, in step S315, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the operation checked in step S314 is acceptable. When it is determined that it is possible (YES in step S315), the process proceeds to step S316. If it is determined that it is not possible (NO in step S315), the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  In the present embodiment, the operations of the corresponding operation switches (the 1-bet switch 33a, the 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36) are performed before the bet processing or the settlement processing is performed by performing the processing of steps S313 to S315 described above. It is determined whether or not the accepting state is possible, and only when it is determined that the accepting state is possible, the process shifts to a storage bet process (MS_BET_IN) or a game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET) process described later. . Specifically, for example, the level data “_PT_IN1_OLD” and the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1 are read by the processing of steps S313 to S315, and if they do not match, it is determined that the operation cannot be accepted in step S315. to decide.

  In step S316, the main control board 60 sets a confirmation request for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal. Here, the rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” of the input port 1 is read.

  In the next step S317, based on the confirmation (reading) in step S316, it is determined whether or not any one of the 1-bet switch 33a, 3-bet switch 33b, or settlement switch 36 has a rising edge. Specifically, is any one of the read D_bit (1 bet switch signal), D3 bit (3 bet switch signal), and D5 bit (payment switch signal) of “_PT_IN1_UP” “1 (ON)”? Determine whether or not.

  More specifically, for example, by performing an AND operation on the read “_PT_IN1_UP” and the definition data defined as “00111000 (B)”, bits (D0 to D2 bits, D6 bits, D7 bits) that are not to be determined Clear Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0”. If the calculation result is "0", it means that there is no rise of any of the signals to be determined (no change in operation of any of the 1-bet switch 33a, 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36) (step). (NO in S317), the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the calculation result is not “0”, it is determined that there is a rise in any of the signals to be determined (the operation has changed in any of the 1-bet switch 33a, the 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36). Since it means (YES in step S317), the process proceeds to step S318.

  In step S318, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “0”.

  When the D0 bit of the game medal management flag is “0 (prohibited)”, the game start LED (status display LED 48d) indicates that the start switch 34 is not enabled (it is disabled even if operated). Turn off the light. On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the game medal management flag is "1 (permitted)", the game start LED (the status display LED 48d) is turned on to indicate that the start switch 34 is enabled. The process of actually turning off / on the game start LED is performed by the LED display control in the interrupt process (step S65 in FIG. 55).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when any one of the signals of the 1-bet switch 33a, the 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36 changes, the game medal management is performed to notify that the start switch 34 is not enabled. After updating the flag data, processing based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 33a, the 3-bet switch 33b, and the settlement switch 36 (reserved bet processing (MS_BET_IN) or game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET)) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 (for example, the winning lottery processing) is executed in the main processing, and the stored betting processing and the game medal settlement are also executed in the main processing. Are not performed at the same time. Specifically, for example, during the processing of the game medal settlement, the role lottery processing based on the start switch 41 is not executed.

  In the next step S319, the main control board 60 sets a data confirmation request relating to the settlement switch signal. Specifically, for example, the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is read. Then, in step S320, the main control board 60 determines whether there is a rise of the settlement switch signal based on “_PT_IN1_UP” read in step S319. Specifically, it checks whether the D5 bit (payment switch signal) of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)” or “0 (OFF)”.

  If the D5 bit of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1” in step S320, it is determined that the settlement switch signal has risen (YES in step S320), and the flow advances to step S322 to execute game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET). . Details of the game medal settlement are shown in FIG.

  If the D5 bit of “_PT_IN1_UP” is “0” in step S320, it is determined that the clearing switch signal does not rise (NO in step S320). In other words, this means that the bet switch signal rises. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S323 to execute the stored bet processing (MS_BET_IN). Details of the storage betting process are shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of the present embodiment, after it is determined in step S312 whether or not the data relating to the insertion sensor signal is ON, the bet switch signal or the settlement in step S317 or step S320. It is determined whether or not the data relating to the switch signal is ON. Therefore, by preferentially checking the insertion of physical game medals detected by the insertion sensor 30 over the bet switch 33 and the settlement switch 36, an effect of preventing “swallow of game medals” can be expected.

  It should be noted that the above-mentioned “checking the insertion of physical gaming medals detected by the insertion sensor 30 with priority over the bet switch 33 and the settlement switch 36” means that steps S33 to S39 are performed in the main process of FIG. When the loop is in progress and the blocker signal is ON, the data of the RWM 63 relating to each input port 61 (input ports 0 to 2) is updated by the interrupt processing, and the input sensor signal is ON. In addition, when the settlement switch signal or the bet switch signal is turned on, the “care medal check (step S321)” is executed more than the “game medal settlement (step S322)” or the “storage bet processing (step S323)”. Refers to program order and program processing that are likely to occur.

  Further, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment has only one settlement switch 36 as a switch for executing the game medal settlement, whereas the switch for executing the accumulated bet processing includes a 1-bet switch 33a. And a three-bet switch 33b. Therefore, if it is determined in step S320 that the stored betting process is to be performed, the rising data corresponding to each of the two switches (the 1-bet switch 33a and the 3-bet switch 33b) must be determined. Must. This may complicate the processing and increase the program capacity. Therefore, in the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of the present embodiment, as described above, in step S320, the rising data of “one” of the settlement switch signal is confirmed to execute the subsequent processing (game medal settlement or accumulated bet processing). ) Judge. By performing such processing, the processing is simplified, and the program capacity is reduced.

[4-2-3-1. Care medal check]
44 and 45 are flowcharts (parts 1 and 2) showing the medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK). The notations [11] to [14] shown in FIGS. 44 and 45 indicate the correspondence between the two drawings, and the entire flowchart of the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. Is shown.

  According to FIGS. 44 and 45, first, in step S331, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “0 (prohibited)”.

  Next, in step S332, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D6 bit (input sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1”. The input sensor 1 corresponds to the input sensor 30a, and the input sensor 2 corresponds to the input sensor 30b. Hereinafter, the description will be made using the terms "input sensor 1" and "input sensor 2" in principle. When it is determined that the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is ON (YES in step S332), the process proceeds to step S333, and when it is determined that the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is not ON (related to the closing sensor 2 signal). If the data is ON (NO in step S332), the process proceeds to step S338.

  In step S333, the passage check time of the input sensor 1 (the number of interrupts is 64, about 143 ms) is set. Here, when a game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 1, the data relating to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned ON. After that, if the data relating to the insertion sensor 1 signal does not become OFF after a predetermined time has elapsed, Since it is considered that the game medals are blocked, the passage check time of the insertion sensor 1 is measured.

  Next, proceeding to step S334, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF, as in step S332. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF (NO in step S334), the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  Here, it is rare that the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal is turned off in step S332 after the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal is turned on in step S332. In some cases, the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is temporarily turned on due to a game medal rampage, and may be detected in step S332. However, even if such a rare phenomenon occurs, the processing in step S334 prevents the process from proceeding to step S335 and subsequent steps. In other words, even if such a phenomenon occurs, it is determined that an error has occurred, and no error notification or the like is performed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S334 that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is not OFF (NO in step S334), the process proceeds to step S335.

  In step S335, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is ON. If it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S335), the process proceeds to step S339. If it is determined that the data is not ON (NO in step S335), step S336 is performed. Proceed to.

  In step S336, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that the switch is ON (YES in step S336), the process proceeds to step S337. When it is determined that the switch is not ON (NO in step S336), the process proceeds to step S338.

  In step S337, the main control board 60 determines whether the passage check time of the input sensor 1 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S333 has exceeded a predetermined time. If it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed (YES in step S337), the process proceeds to step S347. If it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed (NO in step S337), the process returns to step S334.

  As described above, step S338 is a process performed when it is determined in step S332 or step S336 that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is not ON (NO in step S332, NO in step S336). In addition, the process of step S338 is also performed when NO is determined in step S341 described later or when NO is determined in step S345. In step S338, the main control board 60 sets a display request for an illegal token passing error. This medal incorrect passing error is referred to as “CP error” in the present embodiment, and when an incorrect medal passing error occurs, a process of displaying “CP” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the processing in step S338, the process proceeds to step S348.

  In step S348, processing for displaying an error according to the situation until the process proceeds to the step is performed (M_ERROR_DSP). Although a detailed description of the error display (M_ERROR_DSP) will be omitted, if an interrupt process is executed after the process is performed, the error display is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by the LED display control (step S65 in FIG. 55). Is performed. Specifically, for example, when the process proceeds from step S338 to step S348, a medal illegal passing error (CP error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S338, and “CP” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. Is displayed. Further, for example, when the process proceeds from step S347 to step S348, a medal retention error (CE error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S347, and “CE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. . Further, for example, when the process proceeds from step S351 to step S348, a medal abnormal insertion error (C1 error) is displayed based on the display request set in step S349, and “C1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 47. You.

  On the other hand, as described above, when it is determined in step S335 that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S335), the processing in step S339 is performed. In step S339, the main control board 60 sets the passage check time of the input sensor 2 (the number of interruptions is about 143 ms).

  Then, the process proceeds to the next step S340, where the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S340), the process proceeds to step S344, and when it is determined that the data is not ON (NO in step S340), the process proceeds to step S341.

  In step S341, the main control board 60 determines whether or not data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S341), the process proceeds to step S342. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is not ON (NO in step S341), the process proceeds to step S338. As described above, in step S338, a display request for a medal illegal passage error (CP error) is set, and in step S348, a process of displaying the error is performed.

  In step S342, the main control board 60 determines whether the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the time set in step S339 has exceeded a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has elapsed (YES in step S342), the process proceeds to step S347. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has not elapsed (NO in step S342), the process proceeds to step S343.

  In step S343, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the input sensor 1 has elapsed. If it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 1 has elapsed (YES in step S343), the process proceeds to step S347. If it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed (NO in step S343), the process proceeds to step S340. Return.

  Next, step S344 is a process performed when it is determined in step S340 that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S340). Further, also in the case where NO is determined in step S346 described later, the process of step S344 is performed. In step S344, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF (YES in step S344), the process proceeds to step S349. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is not OFF (NO in step S344), the process proceeds to step S345.

  In step S345, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S345), the process proceeds to step S346. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is not ON (NO in step S345), the process proceeds to step S338. As described above, in step S338, a display request for a medal illegal passage error (CP error) is set, and in step S348, a process of displaying the error is performed.

  In step S346, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has elapsed (YES in step S346), the process proceeds to step S347. When it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has not elapsed (NO in step S346), the process returns to step S344.

  As described above, in step S347, when it is determined that the passage check time of the input sensor 2 has elapsed in step S342 or step S346 (YES in step S342, YES in step S346), or in step S343, the input sensor 1 This processing is performed when it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed (YES in step S343). In step S347, the main control board 60 sets a display request of the medal staying error. This medal retention error is an error that the data relating to the insertion sensor 1 signal and the insertion sensor 2 signal remains ON even after the passage of the passage check time, and that the game medals are retained in the game medal passage. In the present embodiment, the medal retention error is referred to as a “CE error”. When a medal retention error occurs, a process of displaying “CE” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the process in step S347, the process proceeds to step S348, in which a process for displaying a CE error (displaying “CE” on the acquired number display LED 47) is performed.

  Next, step S349 is a process performed when it is determined in step S344 that the data related to the input sensor 1 signal and the input sensor 2 signal is OFF (YES in step S344). In step S349, the main control board 60 sets a display request for a medal abnormal insertion error. Here, the medal abnormal insertion error is an error indicating that the passage sensor 28, the insertion sensor 1 (the insertion sensor 30a), and the insertion sensor 2 (the insertion sensor 30b) have passed. In the present embodiment, the medal abnormal insertion error is referred to as “C1 error”, and when an abnormal medal insertion error occurs, a process of displaying “C1” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed.

  However, in step S349, only the display request for the medal abnormal insertion error (C1 error) is set, and the process for displaying the error is not performed. The process of displaying the C1 error is performed by proceeding to step S348 when NO is determined in step S351 described later. That is, if YES is determined in step S351, the process of displaying the C1 error is not performed. After the processing in step S349, the process proceeds to step S350.

  In step S350, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the value of the input monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK”. As described above, the value of “_CT_SEN_CHK” is “+1” when a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28, and “−1” when the game medal is detected by the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. , A counter that repeats “+1” and “0” during normal operation.

  In the next step S351, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the value of the input monitoring counter is in the range of “0” to “3”. If it is determined that it is within the above range (YES in step S351), the process proceeds to step S352. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not within the above range (NO in step S351), the process proceeds to step S348, and a process for displaying an error is performed.

  Here, supplementing a specific case in which the determination at step S351 is NO, the case where the value of the insertion monitoring counter becomes “−1” is that the game medal does not pass through the passage sensor 28 and the insertion sensor 1, There is a case in which it has passed through the input sensor 2. In addition, as a case where the value of the insertion monitoring counter becomes “+4”, there is a case where a game medal that has passed through the passage sensor 28 stays before passing through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2. Each of these cases is classified as a medal abnormal insertion error (C1 error). Therefore, if NO is determined in the step S351, a process for displaying an error is performed in a step S348 based on the display request of the medal abnormal insertion error (C1 error) set in the step S349, and "C1" will be displayed on the display LED 47.

  In step S352, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number. Then, in step S353, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. The processing in steps S352 to S353 is the same as the processing in steps S277 to S278 in FIG. Further, in step S354, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored number.

  In the next step S355, the total number of the current bet number and the stored number is calculated based on the processing results of steps S353 and S354.

Then, in step S356, it is determined whether or not it is impossible to insert a game medal after enabling the insertion of the game medal. Specifically, for example,
“Current bet number” + “Current stored number” −49 = “Medal limit number”
By determining whether or not the relational expression holds, it is determined whether or not it is impossible to insert a game medal.

  For example, when the current bet number is “2” and the current stored number is “50”, the calculation result on the left side of the above equation is “3”. Since this matches the medal limit number “3” in the present embodiment, it is determined that after the currently passed game medals are inserted, further insertion of the game medals is impossible.

  The process (calculation) for determining whether or not the insertion of a game medal is impossible in step S356 is not limited to the above formula. When the above formula is used, the determination may be made through a plurality of processes (calculations). For example, the address storing the "current bet number" is read into the HL register (processing 1), the "current stored number" is read into the A register (processing 2), and the data stored in the HL register (current betting) is read. ) Is added to the A register (Process 3), and the data (A register value) obtained by the addition of Process 3 is compared with the “medal limit number” (Process 4). If it is “0”, it may be determined that “current bet number” + “current stored number” −49 = “medal limit number” (the above formula). In other words, in step S356, it is determined that “current bet number” + “current stored number” −49 = “medal limit number” by at least a predetermined calculation using “number of bets” and “number of stored numbers”. It is possible to make a judgment.

  If it is determined in step S356 that game medals cannot be inserted (YES in step S356), the flow advances to step S357 to execute blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) in order to set the blocker 29 to the OFF state. Proceed to S358. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S356 that a game medal can be inserted (NO in step S356), the process skips step S357 and proceeds to step S358. That is, if YES is determined in step S356, the blocker signal is turned OFF, and a non-permitted game medal path is formed by the OFF blocker 29. If NO is determined in step S356, the blocker signal is The game medal path in the permitted state formed by the blocker 29 in the ON state is maintained with the ON state.

  Then, in step S358, an output request for medal care is set, and in the next step S359, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is executed.

  In the next step S360, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the current bet number has reached a predetermined limit number (upper limit number). When it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number (NO in step S360), the process proceeds to step S361, and one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) shown in FIG. 40 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number is the limit number (YES in step S360), the process proceeds to step S362, and one reserved number is added (MS_CREDIT_ADD). Details of the addition of the stored number of sheets are shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the addition of one stored number (MS_CREDIT_ADD).

  According to FIG. 46, first, in step S371, the main control board 60 reads the stored number of sheets (R_CREDIT_READ). As described with reference to FIG. 38, when the stored number reading is executed, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register), and a zero check is performed.

  Next, in step S372, the main control board 60 adds “1” to the stored number stored in the A register in step S371.

  Then, in the next step S373, the A register value (stored number data) after the addition in step S372 is stored in the stored number display data "_NB_CREDIT_LED" stored in the RWM 63, and the process of this flowchart ends. In step S373, a value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED”.

[4-2-3-2. Game Medal Settlement]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET).

  According to FIG. 47, first, in step S381, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed. More specifically, when the timer value of the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” stored in the address “F027” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed, and other than “0”. In this case, it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has not elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S381 that the monitoring time at blocker ON has elapsed (YES in step S381), the process proceeds to step S382. On the other hand, if it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has not elapsed (NO in step S381), the processing of this flowchart ends. That is, the main control board 60 does not execute the subsequent settlement process until the monitoring time at the time of the blocker ON has elapsed. By such control, an effect of preventing “swallow of game medals” can be obtained. The details will be described after all the processes in the flowchart are described.

  In step S382, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of settlement. Specifically, information “0444 (H)” indicating that settlement is started is stored in the DE register.

  In the next step S383, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a replay operation is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” stored at the address “F01F” of the RWM 63 is “1 (operation)”. When it is determined that the re-game operation is being performed (YES in step S383), the process proceeds to step S394, and when it is determined that the re-game operation is not being performed (re-game non-operation is being performed) (NO in step S383), Proceed to step S384.

  In step S384, the main control board 60 executes game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" stored at the address "F06D" of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Then, in step S385, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a game medal (a bet game medal) to be used for the game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the A register value stored in step S384 is other than “0”. When the A register value is “0”, it is determined that there is no game medal to be used for the game (NO in step S385), and the process proceeds to step S394. When the A register value is other than “0”, it is determined that there is a game medal to be used for a game (YES in step S385), and the process proceeds to step S386.

  In step S386, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF), and in the next step S387, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). As a result of this processing, the information (control command related to the output request at the start of settlement) “0444 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S382 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S388, the main control board 60 executes a game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" stored at the address "F06D" of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S389, the main control board 60 executes one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) for paying out one game medal. Details of paying out one medal are shown in FIGS. 48 and 49.

  Then, in step S390, a display for subtracting one from the input display LEDs (the status display LEDs 48e to 48g) is performed. Specifically, an operation is performed to shift the data of the insertion number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” stored at the address “F060” of the RWM 63 to the left.

  For example, when the bet number is “3”, the inserted number display LED signal data “_PT_MEDAL_LED” becomes “11100000 (B)” (bits D5 to D7 are “1”). At this time, if the left shift operation in step S390 is performed, the result is “11000000 (B)”, which is equivalent to the inserted number display LED signal data when the bet number is “2” (D6 bits and D7 bits are “1”). )). Further, when the left shift operation is further performed, it becomes “10000000 (B)”, which corresponds to the insertion number display LED signal data when the bet number is “1” (D7 bit is “1”).

  In other words, each time one game medal is paid out by executing one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) in step S389, the left shift calculation is performed in step S390, so that the lighting state of the inserted number display LED is "3", “2” and “1” can be set. In other words, “3BET (status display LED 48g)”, “2BET (status display LED 48f)”, and “1 BET (status display LED 48e)” can be sequentially turned off (see FIG. 7).

  Next, in step S391, the main control board 60 executes game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ). By this processing, the value of the game medal number data "_NB_PLAY_MEDAL" stored at the address "F06D" of the RWM 63 is read and stored in the A register.

  Then, in step S392, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a game medal to be provided for a game (a bet game medal), as in step S385 described above. When it is determined that there is no game medal to be used for the game (NO in step S392), the process returns to step S388, and the processes in steps S388 to S392 are repeated until the bet number becomes “0”. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a game medal to be used for the game (YES in step S392), the process proceeds to step S393.

  In step S393, the main control board 60 clears the medal limit flag. Specifically, the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is cleared (set to “0”). After the processing in step S393, the process proceeds to step S402.

  Step S394 is processing executed when it is determined in step S383 that a replay operation is being performed (YES), or when it is determined in step S385 that there is no game medal to be used for a game (NO). . In step S394, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored number. By this processing, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Then, in the next step S395, it is determined whether or not there is a stored medal. Specifically, when the A register value stored in step S394 is “0”, it is determined that there is no stored medal, and when the A register value is not “0”, it is determined that there is a stored medal. If it is determined in step S395 that there is a stored medal (YES in step S395), the process proceeds to step S396 to start a process for adjusting the stored medal. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S395 that there is no stored medal (NO in step S395), there is no game medal to be settled, and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S396, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF), and in the next step S397, the main control board 60 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). As a result of this processing, the information (control command related to the output request at the start of settlement) “0444 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S382 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S398, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the stored number. By this processing, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Next, in step S399, the main control board 60 executes payout of one medal (M_1MEDAL_PAY). As described above, details of the payout of one medal are shown in FIGS. Further, in step S400, the main control board 60 executes one stored number subtraction (M_CREDIT_DEC) for subtracting one from the stored number. Details of the subtraction of one stored sheet are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S401, the main control board 60 determines whether the settlement of the stored medals has been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether the data stored in the A register (the stored number data after subtraction) is “0” by executing the subtraction of one stored number in step S400. Note that the determination may be made based on the data stored in the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” instead of the A register value. If the stored number data after subtraction is other than “0”, it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals is not completed (NO in step S401), and the process returns to step S398, where the stored number after subtraction is “0”. Is repeated (until the stored medals are exhausted), the processing of steps S398 to S401 is repeated. On the other hand, if the stored number data after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the settlement of the stored medals has been completed (YES in step S401), and the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of the settlement. Specifically, information “0445 (H)” indicating that the settlement is completed is stored in the DE register.

  Then, in step S403, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). As a result of this processing, the information (control command related to the output request at the time of settlement completion) “0445 (H)” stored in the DE register in step S402 is stored in the control command buffer of the RWM 63. After the end of step S403, the process proceeds to step S404, in which the blocker 29 is controlled to the ON state (permitted position) by executing the blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON).

  As described above, the main control board 60 executes the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET). However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed in step S381 (elapsed). In this case, by executing the settlement process, an effect of preventing “swallowing of game medals” due to the operation of the settlement switch 36 can be obtained. The reason will be described in detail below.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 15, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” measures the standby time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position). The timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is set to the initial value “when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising data“ _PT_IN2_UP ”becomes“ 1 ”when the selector passage sensor signal rises. 45 "is set, and" 1 "is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, control to change the blocker 29 from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position) is not permitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 and the passage sensor 28 detects the game medal in the game medal selector 27, the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is set, and the predetermined time (45) Until the interruption (about 101 ms) has elapsed, the blocker 29 cannot be changed to the OFF state (non-permitted position). The predetermined time of the blocker ON monitoring time is a time sufficient for the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, the blocker 29 Is sufficient time until it is detected by the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b). In other words, the time difference between the initial value “45” and the final value “0” of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is determined by detecting the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 by the insertion sensors 30 (30a, 30b). Is set to be longer than the time required until

  In step S281 of the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET), the settlement process is not executed after step S282 until the monitoring time at blocker ON set as described above elapses. Even if 36 is operated, the game medals are not settled.

  Here, if it is assumed that the control of step S281 is not performed (that is, the settlement process can be executed without making a determination based on the monitoring time when the blocker is ON), a game medal (passage) inserted from the game medal slot 26 is set. When the settlement switch 36 is operated while the game medal detected by the sensor 28 passes through the game medal selector 27, an output request at the start of settlement is set as shown in FIG. 47 (step S382), By executing the blocker OFF and the control command set 1 (steps S386, S387, S396, S397), preparations for starting settlement of bet medals or stored medals are performed. As a result, the insertion process (care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK)) based on the insertion of game medals is not executed.

  At this time, even if the insertion process is not performed, if the inserted game medals are returned from the payout port 53 through the “non-permitted game medal path” formed with the blocker OFF, the player Is not disadvantageous. However, if the control to change the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permitted position) cannot be made in time, the inserted game medals will be stored in the hopper 50 without performing the insertion process. That is, "swallow of game medals" is caused by the operation of the settlement switch 36, and disadvantage is given to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, until the predetermined time elapses after the blocker ON monitoring time is set (if the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”), the settlement switch is set. By disallowing the execution of the settlement process based on the operation of the 36 (the process from step S282 of the game medal settlement (M_MEDAL_RET)), the game medal inserted immediately before the operation of the settlement switch 36 is inserted. The processing is carried out reliably and then stored in the hopper 50. That is, in this case, “swallow of game medals” due to the operation of the settlement switch 36 does not occur.

  Summarizing the above, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the operation of the settlement switch 36 when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”). By allowing the predetermined process (payment process) to be executed, swallowing of the game medal can be prevented even when the payment switch 36 is operated in a situation where the game medal is inserted.

  More specifically, when the settlement switch 36 is operated in a situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment ) Can be settled.

  Further, when the settlement switch 36 is operated, when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment ) Can be settled.

  In other words, in other words, when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is not a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”), the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment By not performing the predetermined process (payment process) based on the operation, even if the payment switch 36 is operated in a situation where a game medal is inserted, swallowing of the game medal can be prevented. it can.

  More specifically, when the settlement switch 36 is operated in a situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is other than “0”, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment Medal) cannot be settled.

  Further, when the settlement switch 36 is operated, when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment ) Cannot be settled.

  48 and 49 are flowcharts (part 1 and part 2) showing payout of one medal (M_1MEDAL_PAY). Note that the notation [21] to [25] shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 indicates the correspondence between the two drawings, and one medal payout (M_1MEDAL_PAY) is shown in FIGS. 48 and 49. A flowchart is shown.

  According to FIGS. 48 and 49, first, in step S411, the main control board 60 sets an error non-detection. That is, a state in which no error is detected is set as an initial state.

  Next, in step S412, the main control board 60 sets a display request for a medal jam error. Here, the medal jam error is an error indicating that a game medal is jammed in a game medal passage or the like. In the present embodiment, the medal clogging error is referred to as “HP error”, and when a medal clogging error occurs, a process of displaying “HP” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed.

  Next, in step S413, the main control board 60 determines whether an error has been detected. If it is determined that an error has been detected (YES in step S413), the process proceeds to step S414, an error display (M_ERROR_DSP) is executed, and the process proceeds to another location, step S415. The error display (M_ERROR_DSP) has been described in step S348 of FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S413 that no error has been detected (NO in step S413), the process proceeds to step S415.

  In step S415, the main control board 60 sets the control time of the game medal payout device 49 (game medal payout device control time). Specifically, "2686" (2686 interrupts correspond to about 6000 ms) is set in the 2-byte timer of the game medal payout device control time "_TM2_HE_CHK" stored in the addresses "F028" to "F029" of the RWM 63. Then, the timer (control time) starts counting. As described above with reference to FIG. 15, in the present embodiment, when the clocking of “_TM2_HE_CHK” is started, the time until the timer value becomes “0” (that is, about 6 seconds If the game medal is not paid out from the game medal payout device 49 until the time elapses, it is determined that a medal empty error has occurred. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a medal empty error based on the timer value of “_TM2_HE_CHK”.

  Next, in step S416, the main control board 60 performs a process for driving the hopper motor 51. Specifically, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is set to “1 (ON)”. With this processing, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the output port 3 becomes “1” at the time of the next interrupt processing.

  Next, in step S417, the main control board 60 reads the game medal payout device control time “_TM2_HE_CHK” set in step S415. In step S418, it is determined whether the control time has elapsed based on whether the timer value read in step S417 is "0". If the timer value is "0", it is determined that the control time has elapsed (YES in step S418), and the flow advances to step S432. On the other hand, when the timer value is other than “0”, it is determined that the control time has not elapsed (NO in step S418), and the process proceeds to step S419.

  In step S419, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (dispensing sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”. When it is determined to be ON (YES in step S419), the process proceeds to step S420, and when it is determined that it is not ON (NO in step S419), the process returns to step S417.

  In step S420, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 1 (for example, 46 interrupts, about 102.8 ms), and starts counting the timer (detection time). Specifically, “46” is stored in “_TM1_PAY” of the address “F023”, and is updated (subtracted) by “1” by the timer interrupt processing.

  Next, in step S421, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal clog has been detected. When it is determined that a medal clogging is detected (YES in step S421), the process proceeds to step S412, and a display request for a medal clogging error is set as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal clogging is not detected (NO in step S421), the process proceeds to step S422.

  In step S422, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (dispensing sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “1 (ON)”. If it is determined to be ON (YES in step S422), the process proceeds to step S423, and if it is determined not to be ON (NO in step S422), the process returns to step S417.

  In step S423, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether the D4 bit (dispensing sensor 1 signal) and the D3 bit (dispensing sensor 2 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” are “1 (ON)”. When both the D3 bit and the D4 bit are “1”, it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal is ON (YES in step S423), and the process proceeds to step S424. If at least one of the D3 bit or D4 bit is not “1”, it is determined that the data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal and the payout sensor 2 signal is not ON (NO in step S423), and the process returns to step S421. .

  In step S424, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 2, and starts measuring the timer (detection time). Although not shown, the 1-byte timer storage area of the RWM 63 may have a storage area for storing the number of interrupts (for example, “23”) corresponding to the detection time.

  Next, in step S425, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal jam is detected, as in step S421. If it is determined that a medal clog is detected (YES in step S425), the process proceeds to step S412, and a display request for a medal clog error is set. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal clogging is not detected (NO in step S425), the process proceeds to step S426.

  In step S426, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit (dispensing sensor 2 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “0 (OFF)”. When it is determined to be OFF (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427, and when it is determined that the switch is not OFF (NO in step S426), the process returns to step S425.

  In step S427, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. If determined to be invalid (YES in step S427), the process returns to step S417, and if determined not to be invalid (NO in step S427), the process proceeds to step S428.

  In step S428, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether the D4 bit (dispensing sensor 1 signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” is “0 (OFF)”. When it is determined to be OFF (YES in step S428), the process proceeds to step S429, and when it is determined not to be OFF (NO in step S428), the process returns to step S425.

  In step S429, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the remaining payout number (count value). Next, in step S430, it is determined whether or not the medal payout is completed. When it is determined that the medal payout has been completed (YES in step S430), the process proceeds to step S431, and when it is determined that the medal payout has not been completed (NO in step S430), the processing of this flowchart is ended.

  In step S431, the main control board 60 performs a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 51. Specifically, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data “_PT_BLK_HPM” is set to “0 (OFF)”. By this processing, the D7 bit (hopper motor drive signal) of the output port 3 becomes “0” at the time of the next interrupt processing. After the processing of step S431, the main control board 60 ends the processing of this flowchart.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S418 that the game medal payout device control time has elapsed (YES in step S418), the process of step S432 is performed.

  In step S432, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 51, as in step S431. Then, in the next step S433, similarly to step S420, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set, and counting of the timer (detection time) is started.

  Next, in step S434, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. The specific processing is the same as, for example, step S419. If it is determined in step S434 that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON (YES in step S434), the process proceeds to step S414. On the other hand, when it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is not ON (NO in step S434), the process proceeds to step S435.

  In step S435, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the detection time of the payout sensor 1 that has started measuring time in step S433 (or step S420) has passed a predetermined time, that is, whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Judge. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S435), the process proceeds to step S436, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S435), the process returns to step S434.

  Here, the case in which YES is determined in step S435 means that the payout sensor 1 recognizes the game medal at the timing when the control time of the game medal payout device 49 has elapsed, despite the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has elapsed. No detection, that is, no game medal has been paid out. Therefore, in step S436, a display request for a medal empty error is set. Here, the medal empty error is referred to as “HE error” in the present embodiment, and when a medal empty error occurs, a process of displaying “HE” on the acquired number display LED 47 is executed. After the processing in step S436, the process proceeds to step 413.

  As described above, the main control board 60 performs the process of paying out one game medal.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing subtraction of one stored number (M_CREDIT_DEC).

  According to FIG. 50, first, in step S441, the main control board 60 reads the stored number of sheets (R_CREDIT_READ). As described with reference to FIG. 38, when the stored number reading is executed, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register), and a zero check is performed.

  Next, in step S442, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the stored number stored in the A register in step S441. At this time, the data after the subtraction is converted into a decimal number, and the converted data is stored in the A register.

  Then, in the next step S443, the A register value (stored number data) stored after the subtraction in step S442 is stored in the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” stored in the RWM 63, and the processing of this flowchart ends. In step S443, the data converted to a decimal number in step S442 is stored in “_NB_CREDIT_LED”.

[4-2-3-3. Storage bet processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the stored bet processing (MS_BET_IN).

  According to FIG. 51, first, in step S451, the main control board 60 reads the D7 bit (game medal limit determination) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS”, so that the medal limit flag is turned on (“1 (limit)). )). When it is determined that the medal limit flag is ON (YES in step S451), it means that the bet number is already the maximum number, and thus the stored bet processing according to this flowchart ends. That is, even if the operation of the bet switch 33 is detected in step S320 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. 43 and the flow shifts to this flowchart (the shift from NO in step S320 to step S323), the bet number has already reached the maximum. If the number is the number, the process returns to the main process without performing the storage bet process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the medal limit flag is ON (YES in step S451), the flow advances to step S452 to set "1" as the requested bet (insertion) number. Specifically, “1” is stored in the B register.

  Next, in step S453, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (whether or not there is a rise). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)”. If it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (YES in step S453), the process proceeds to step S458. If it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has not been operated (NO in step S453), the process proceeds to step S454.

  In the processing performed before step S453 (steps S317 and S320 in FIG. 43), since the operation of any one of the bet switches 33 is detected, if NO is determined in step S453, the three-bet switch 33b is turned off. It means that it was determined that the operation was performed.

  In step S454, the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number. For example, in a normal game, the medal limit number “3” is stored in the C register.

  Then, in the next step S455, the main control board 60 executes a game medal read (R_PLYMDL_READ) to read the bet number. By this processing, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in the A register. In step S454, the address “F06D” of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in the HL register.

  Next, in step S456, the main control board 60 sets the required number of bets. Specifically, first, the C register value is stored in the A register. When the medal limit number is set to “3” as described in step S454, the A register value becomes “3”. Further, data (bet number) at the address indicated by the HL register is subtracted from the A register value (medal limit number), and the result is stored in the A register. In the above example, if the bet number (the number of game medals already bet) is “1”, the A register value is updated to “2”. The value (A register value) calculated by such calculation is the number of game medals to be newly added as a bet.

  Next, in step S457, the value calculated in step S456 is set as the requested bet number as a process of correcting the bet request number. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the B register.

  To summarize the processing of steps S451 to S457, the bet request number is set to "1" as an initial value in the B register in step S452, and when the 1-bet switch 33a is operated (when YES is determined in step S453), the setting is performed. While the requested bet number is left as it is (that is, the B register value is “1”), when the three-bet switch 33b is operated (when NO is determined in step S453), the number of game medals newly added as a bet is determined. The calculation is performed in step S456, and the calculation result is reset to the bet request number in step S457 (the B register value is set to “2” in the above example).

  Next, in step S458, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ), and reads the stored number. By this processing, the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is stored in the A register.

  Then, in a step S459, it is determined whether or not there is a stored medal. Specifically, when the A register value stored in step S458 is “0”, it is determined that there is no stored medal, and when the A register value is not “0”, it is determined that there is a stored medal. If it is determined in step S459 that there is a stored medal (YES in step S459), the process proceeds to step S460. If it is determined in step S459 that there is no stored medal (NO in step S459), the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S460, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (whether or not there is a rise). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)”. When it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has been operated (there is a rise) (YES in step S460), the process proceeds to the step S462 via the step S461, and it is determined that the 1-bet switch 33a has not been operated (there is no rise). If so (NO in step S460), the process proceeds to step S462 without performing step S461.

  In step S461, the main control board 60 clears the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal. Specifically, a process of setting the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” to “0” is executed. That is, when the operation of the 1-bet switch 33a is detected in step S460, the rising bet data is cleared, and then the stored bet processing in step S462 and thereafter is executed.

  Here, the reason why the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal (the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 33a) is cleared in step S461 as described above will be described in detail below.

  First, as described above, the rising data of the input ports 0 to 2 is generated and stored by the interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, when executing the betting process, a process of clearing the rising data (the 1-bet switch signal of “_PT_IN1_UP”) related to the 1-bet switch 33a generated and stored by the interrupt process is executed in the main process. Here, if the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 33a is not cleared, the rising data “1” related to the 1-bet switch 33a is maintained until the interruption process is executed again. In such a case, before the next interrupt process is executed and the rising data relating to the 1-bet switch 33a is updated to “0”, the bet switch 33 is determined in step S317 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. Is determined (YES), and the stored bet processing (MS_BET_IN) is executed again. Based on the fact that the rising data of the 1-bet switch signal is “1”, one bet switch signal is generated again. The storage bet process is executed. That is, at this time, when the player operates the 1-bet switch 33a and tries to bet one game medal, there is a possibility that two or three game medals are continuously bet.

  In order to avoid such an inconvenience, in the present embodiment, when there is a stored medal, the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 33a is cleared before the start of the stored bet processing after step S462.

  In this embodiment, only the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 33a is cleared, and when the 3-bet switch 33b is operated, the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 33b (the 3-bet switch signal of “_PT_IN1_UP”) is cleared. Is not executed. The reason is as follows.

  In the present embodiment, when three reserved medals are bet based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 33b, the medal limit flag is set in the one-medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) executed in step S466 described later. (Step S280 in FIG. 40). By controlling in this way, the rising data "1" of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is temporarily changed until the next interrupt processing is executed, as in the specific example in the above description regarding the clearing of the 1-bet switch signal. It is determined that the bet switch 33 has risen in step S317 of the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) shown in FIG. 43 (YES), and even if the stored bet processing (MS_BET_IN) is executed again, the above-described step S451 is performed. When it is determined that the medal limit flag is ON (YES), the stored bet processing is not executed.

  Further, for example, when the bet number before the 3-bet switch 33b is operated is “0” and the stored number is “2”, the bet number becomes “2” based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 33b. . At this time, since the bet number has not reached the limit number yet, the medal limit flag does not become “1”. In this state, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is not cleared, and even if the stored bet processing (MS_BET_IN) is executed again before the next interrupt processing is executed, “NO” is determined in step S451. , But since “NO” is determined in the step S459, the processing after the step S460 is not executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the storage bet from being performed more than expected as in the specific example of the 1-bet switch signal without clearing the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 33b. That is, in the present embodiment, at least the rising data relating to the 1-bet switch 33a may be cleared, and the clearing of the rising data relating to the 3-bet switch 33b is not necessarily required.

  However, if the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 33b is left at “1”, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is “1” until the next interrupt processing is executed. It is true that the storage bet process is executed (the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 51). Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid this, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal may be cleared. More specifically, the process of step S460 may be replaced with a process of clearing the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal instead of "determining whether or not there is rising data of the 1-bet switch signal". The clearing process of the rising data of the 3-bet switch 33b signal is a process of setting the D3 bit of the rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) of the input port 1 to “0”. As another method, a process of clearing one address “F00B” of the RWM 63 storing the rising data of the input port 1 may be adopted.

  Further, another method may be adopted as a method of clearing “rising data of 1-bet switch signal” or “rising data of 3-bet switch signal”. As an example of “rising data of 1-bet switch signal”, it is determined whether the D4 bit (1-bet switch signal) of input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)” and then again. Wait until at least one interrupt process is executed before determining whether the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)” The processing may be executed. In this way, the next interrupt processing is executed during the execution of the wait processing in a situation where the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” is “1 (ON)”. Accordingly, the D4 bit (1 bet switch signal) of the input port 1 rising data “_PT_IN1_UP” becomes “0 (OFF)”, so that the “1 betting switch signal rising data” can be reliably cleared. This prevents a plurality of bets from being made when the one-bet switch is operated once.

  Return to the description of each step in the storage bet process.

  In step S462, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the stored number read in step S458 is equal to or larger than the bet request number set in step S452 or S457. Specifically, a process of subtracting the B register value (bet request number) from the A register value (reserved number) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0” or more. If the above calculation result indicates “0” or more, it is determined that the stored number is equal to or more than the requested number of bets (YES in step S462), and the process proceeds to step S464. On the other hand, if the above calculation result indicates less than “0”, it is determined that the number of stored coins is not more than the requested number of bets (NO in step S462), and the process proceeds to step S464 via step S463.

  In step S463, the main control board 60 sets the number of stored game medals. This process is a process of separately setting the total number of stored sheets to the number of added sheets. That is, when NO is determined in step S462, it means that the stored number is less than the bet number, and the process of setting the total stored number to the bet added number is performed. Specifically, the A register value (stored number) is stored in the B register. After the processing in step S463, the process proceeds to step S464.

  Here, the processing up to step S463 described above is summarized for the bet addition number.

  If YES is determined in step S453 (when the 1-bet switch 33a is operated), the bet request number “1” set in step S452 is stored in the B register as the bet addition number. In step S457, for example, the required number of bets “3” is set, and in step S462, if YES (there is more than the required number of bets), then the required number of bets “3” is set as B Stored in a register. If, for example, the requested bet number “3” is set in step S457, but the stored number is “2”, it is determined in step S462 that the answer is NO (the stored number is less than the requested bet number), and step S463 is performed. Is stored in the B register as the bet addition number.

  As described above, the bet addition number (bet request number) indicates the number of bets actually placed based on the effect result when the bet switch 33 is operated.

  In step S464, the main control board 60 sets an output request for a storage bet. Specifically, control command data (for example, “10 (H)”) is stored in the D register, and the B register value is stored in the E register. Here, the D register value is a control command indicating that the storage bet is related, and the E register value is a control command indicating the bet addition number.

  Next, in step S465, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). Specifically, a process of writing control command data (DE register value) to the control command buffer is performed.

  Then, in step S466, the main control board 60 executes the one-medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) shown in FIG. When the one-medal addition processing is executed, “1” is added to the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL”.

  Next, in step S467, the main control board 60 executes the subtraction of the stored number by one (M_CREDIT_DEC), and subtracts one from the stored number. Details of the subtraction of one stored sheet are shown in FIG.

  Then, in step S468, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the requested number of bets has been completed. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the B register value (the bet request number), and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is “0”. When the B register value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the bet of the requested number has been completed (YES in step S468), and the flow proceeds to step 472. On the other hand, when the B register value after the subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the bet of the requested number has not been completed (NO in step S468), and the process proceeds to step S469.

  In step S469, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). Then, in step S470, the standby time at the time of the storage bet is set. Specifically, for example, “46” is set as the count value of the number of interrupts. Then, in step S471, “1” is subtracted from the count value for each interrupt, and wait processing is executed until the count value becomes “0”. After the end of the wait processing, the process returns to step S466. The standby time at the time of the reserved bet in step S470 may be configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area of the 1-byte timer storage area (see FIGS. 15 and 59) of the RWM 63.

  Note that the processing for controlling the blocker 29 to the OFF state in step S469 is performed because the weight processing is set when repeating one medal (M_1MEDAL_INC), and the game medals are maintained during this weight processing. This is to prevent the occurrence of “swallow of game medals” when the player has been inserted.

  As described above, when betting two or more game medals, one medal addition (M_1MEDAL_INC) in step S466 and the weight process in step S471 are repeated. By repeating the processing with the weight processing interposed in this way, for example, when three game medals are bet based on the operation of the three-bet switch 33b, three bets are instantaneously placed (the insertion display LED ( Instead of lighting the status display LEDs 48e to 48g)), the insertion display LEDs can be sequentially turned on each time one bet is placed.

  When the main control board 60 finally determines that the requested number of bets has been completed in step S468 (YES in step S468), the main control board 60 controls the blocker 29 to the ON state (permitted position) in step 472. Execute blocker ON (M_BLOCKER_ON). Then, the processing of this flowchart ends. By performing the processing of step S472, the blocker 29 is turned on after the processing of the storage bet processing, so that the game medals can be serviced.

  In FIG. 51, after clearing the rising data relating to the 1-bet switch 33a in step S461, the process of adding one medal in steps S466 to S471 is repeated until the number of added bets becomes “0”. May be reversed. Further, in the present embodiment, the rising data relating to the bet switch 33 (particularly, the 1-bet switch 33a) may be cleared before the next bet processing (re-stored bet processing) is executed.

[4-2-4. Start switch check]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start switch check (M_START_CHK). "Start switch check" is a subroutine executed in step S38 in the main process shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 52, first, in step S481, the main control board 60 checks a sensor abnormality relating to insertion or dispensing. Specifically, any one of the D4 bit (CH error), D5 bit (C0 error), and D6 bit (H0 error) of the sub notification flag 2 “_FL_SUB_INF2” stored in the address “F013” of the RWM 63 is “1 ( At the time of detection). " If any of the D4 to D6 bits is “1”, an error display (M_ERROR_DSP) process is executed based on the detected error. The error display (M_ERROR_DSP) is as described above in step S348 of FIG.

  Next, in step S482, it is determined whether or not (the number of bets) matches the specified number according to the gaming state. When it is determined that the bet number matches the specified number corresponding to the gaming state (YES in step S482), the process proceeds to step S483. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of bets does not match the specified number corresponding to the gaming state (NO in step S482), it means that the operation to the start switch 34 cannot be accepted, and the process of this flowchart is performed. Then, the process returns to step S33 in the main process (FIG. 34).

  In step S483, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the monitoring time at blocker ON has elapsed. More specifically, when the timer value of the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” stored in the address “F027” of the RWM 63 is “0”, it is determined that the blocker ON monitoring time has elapsed, and other than “0”. In this case, it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has not elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S483 that the monitoring time at blocker ON has elapsed (YES in step S483), the process advances to step S484. On the other hand, when it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has not elapsed (NO in step S483), the process proceeds to step S487. Step S487 will be described later, but if it is determined NO in step S483, a process of allowing the operation of the start switch 34 to be accepted (specifically, setting of a start switch acceptance permission flag in step S486 described later) is performed. Instead, the processing of this flowchart ends. That is, in the main control board 60, the operation of the start switch 34 is not validated (not accepted) until the monitoring time when the blocker is ON, and the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 is not executed. By such control, an effect of preventing “swallow of game medals” can be obtained. The details will be described after all the processes in the flowchart are described.

  In step S484, the main control board 60 checks whether the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted. In this process, it is confirmed whether or not an operation switch other than the start switch 34 (for example, any one of the bet switch 32, the stop switch 35, and the settlement switch 36) is being operated. If any operation switch other than the start switch 34 has not been operated, it is determined that the start switch operation can be accepted (YES in step S484), and the flow advances to step S486. If any operation switch other than the start switch 34 is being operated, it is determined that the start switch operation cannot be accepted (NO in step S484), and the process proceeds to step S487.

  Step S486 is a process executed when it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has elapsed (YES in step S483) and when it is determined that the start switch operation can be accepted (YES in step S485). In step S486, the main control board 60 sets a start switch acceptance permission flag. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “1 (permitted)”.

  When the LED display control is performed at the time of executing the next interrupt process by performing the process of step S486, the game start LED (the status display LED 48d) is turned on. That is, the fact that the start switch 34 is valid (that the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted) can be notified by the lamp. After the end of step S486, the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, step S487 is executed when it is determined that the monitoring time at blocker ON has not elapsed (NO in step S483) or when it is determined that the start switch operation cannot be accepted (NO in step S485). This is the process to be performed. In any of such cases, it is not a situation in which the start switch 34 should be enabled. Therefore, in step S487, the main control board 60 clears the start switch acceptance permission flag. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” stored at the address “F01E” of the RWM 63 is set to “0 (prohibited)”.

  By performing the process of step S487, when the LED display control is performed at the time of executing the next interrupt process, the game start LED (the status display LED 48d) is turned off. That is, the fact that the start switch 34 is not effective (a state in which operation cannot be accepted) can be notified by a lamp. After the end of step S487, the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, the main control board 60 executes the start lever check (M_START_CHK), but in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” has elapsed (elapsed) in step S483. ), If no other operation switch is being operated (YES in step S485), the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted (step S486), and the process based on the operation of the start switch 34 can be executed. I do. By such control, an effect of preventing “swallow of game medals” due to the operation of the start switch 34 can be obtained. The reason will be described in detail below.

  First, as described with reference to FIG. 15, the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” measures the standby time until the blocker 29 is changed from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position). The timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is set to the initial value “when the D7 bit of the input port 2 rising data“ _PT_IN2_UP ”becomes“ 1 ”when the selector passage sensor signal rises. 45 "is set, and" 1 "is subtracted for each interrupt. Until the timer value becomes “0”, control to change the blocker 29 from the ON state (permitted position) to the OFF state (non-permitted position) is not permitted.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when a game medal is inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 and the passage sensor 28 detects the game medal in the game medal selector 27, the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is set, and the predetermined time (45) Until the interruption (about 101 ms) has elapsed, the blocker 29 cannot be changed to the OFF state (non-permitted position). The predetermined time of the blocker ON monitoring time is a time sufficient for the game medals detected by the passage sensor 28 to flow down the game medal passage and pass through the installation position of the blocker 29 (more specifically, the blocker 29 Is sufficient time until it is detected by the input sensor 30 (30a, 30b). In other words, the time difference between the initial value “45” and the final value “0” of the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is determined by detecting the game medal detected by the passage sensor 28 by the insertion sensors 30 (30a, 30b). Is set to be longer than the time required until

  In step S483 of the start lever check (M_START_CHK), the operation of the start switch 34 can be accepted until the monitoring time at blocker ON set as described above elapses, regardless of the operation status of other operation switches. Is not executed (step S486), even if the start switch 34 is operated at this timing, the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34 is not executed.

  Here, if the control in step S483 is not performed (that is, the determination based on the monitoring time when the blocker is ON is not performed), the game medal inserted from the game medal insertion slot 26 is detected by the passage sensor 28. However, as shown in FIG. 52, if an operation switch other than the start switch 34 (for example, any of the bet switch 32, the stop switch 35, and the settlement switch 36) is not being operated (YES in step S485), the start is performed. The switch reception permission flag is set, and the operation of the start switch 34 can be received (step S486).

  In such a situation, when the start switch 34 is operated while the game medal passes through the game medal selector 27, it is determined that the start switch 34 is operated in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 34). (YES in step S39), start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL) and the like based on the operation of the start switch 34 are executed (step S40), so that the insertion process (care medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK)) based on the insertion of game medals is performed. Will not be executed. In the start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL), blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF) is executed (step S494 in FIG. 53).

  At this time, even if the insertion process is not performed, if the inserted game medals are returned from the payout port 53 through the “non-permitted game medal path” formed with the blocker OFF, the player Is not disadvantageous. However, if the control to change the blocker 29 to the OFF state (non-permitted position) cannot be made in time, the inserted game medals will be stored in the hopper 50 without performing the insertion process. In other words, the operation of the start switch 34 causes a “swallow of game medals”, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the start switch is set until the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0” until the predetermined time elapses after the monitoring time at blocker ON is set. By preventing the operation of the start switch 34 from being validated (the start switch acceptance permission flag is not set) and executing the processing based on the operation of the start switch 34, the game medal inserted immediately before the operation of the start switch 34 is operated. In this case, the charging process is reliably performed, and then the hopper 50 is accommodated. That is, in this case, “swallow of game medals” due to the operation of the start switch 34 does not occur.

  Summarizing the above, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the operation of the start switch 34 when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”). A predetermined process (start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL)) can be executed to prevent swallowing of game medals even when the start switch 34 is operated in a situation where game medals are inserted. Can be.

  More specifically, when the start switch 34 is operated in a situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment Based processing (acquisition of random numbers for winning combinations, start of reel rotation, etc.) can be executed. The specific contents of the "processing based on the operation of the start switch 34" are shown in, for example, steps S491, S496, and S498 in FIG. 53 and steps S41 and S42 in FIG.

  Further, when the start switch 34 is operated, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is “0”, the operation of the start switch 34 Based processing (acquisition of random numbers for winning combinations, start of reel rotation, etc.) can be executed.

  In other words, in other words, when the value of the predetermined timer of the RWM 63 is not a specific value (the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0”), the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment By not performing a predetermined process based on the operation (such as obtaining random numbers for winning a lottery or starting reel rotation), even when the start switch 34 is operated in a situation where a game medal is inserted, Swallowing of game medals can be prevented.

  More specifically, when the start switch 34 is operated in a situation where the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is other than “0”, the operation of the start switch 34 (Acquisition of random numbers for winning lottery, start of reel rotation, etc.) are not executed.

  Also, when the start switch 34 is operated, the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines that the timer value of “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is not “0” when the main control board 60 determines that the timer value is not “0”. Based processing (acquisition of random numbers for winning combinations, start of reel rotation, etc.) is not executed.

[4-2-5. Start switch accepted]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing start switch acceptance (M_START_CTL). "Start switch acceptance" is a subroutine executed in step S40 in the main processing shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 53, first, in step S491, the main control board 60 stores the built-in random number in a register (random number soft latch register) of the MPU. The process of step S491 is latching (acquisition) of a random number, and whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to a winning combination is determined in step S41 (lottery lottery process) in FIG.

  In the next step S492, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch. Specifically, the D0 bit (start switch acceptance state) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “0”.

  Next, in step S493, the main control board 60 clears the setting change permission flag. Specifically, the D6 bit (setting change disable flag) of the game medal management flag “_FL_MEDAL_STS” is set to “1 (ON)”. This processing makes setting change impossible.

  In the next step S494, the main control board 60 executes blocker OFF (M_BLOCKER_OFF). That is, after the start switch 34 is operated, control is performed so that game medals are not accepted even if they are inserted.

  In the next step S495, game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) is executed, and the number of bets is read. The read bet number is stored in the A register.

  In the next step S496, the main control board 60 sets an output request to start reel rotation. Specifically, for example, “13 (H)” is set as the first control command value, and the A register value is set as the second control command. In step S497, the number of bets (A register value) read in step S495 is set in the E register (medal number setting). Further, in step S498, the main control board 60 stores the control command data set in step S496 in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 by executing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). In other words, a process for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 a command indicating that the game is started by operating the start lever (start switch 34) is executed.

  Next, in step S499, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the set value stored in the RWM 63 is within the normal range (whether or not the value of the set value data “_NB_BANK” is within the normal range). . When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range of “1” to “6” (YES in step S499), the process proceeds to step S500. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range (NO in step S499), the process proceeds to step S505, and a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to an “E6” error is executed. Details of the unrecoverable error processing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main control board 60 executes game medal reading (R_PLYMDL_READ) and reads the bet number. The read bet number is stored in the A register. At the time of winning a replay, the number of game medals automatically bet is set as the bet number.

  Next, in step S501, the number of bets read in step S500 is doubled. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the address “F06F” of the medal insertion signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN” is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S502, the main control board 60 prohibits the interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S121 in FIG. 29 and the like, and controls so that an interrupt does not occur even if an interrupt request signal is input.

  Next, in step S503, the main control board 60 sets the number of times of medal insertion signal output. Specifically, first, the value (medal insertion signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN”) stored in the address indicated by the HL register (in this case, “F06F” stored in step S501) and the A register value (in this case, , And the number of bets doubled in step S501), and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the A register value is stored in the address (“F06F”) indicated by the HL register. Through the processing in step S503, the medal insertion signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_IN” stored at the address “F06F” of the RWM 63 is updated.

  Then, after the process of step S503, the process proceeds to step S504, in which the prohibition of the interrupt performed in step S502 is released (interrupt permitted), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In the present embodiment, the interrupt processing is prohibited in steps S502 to S504 as described above, so that the interrupt processing is executed during the updating of the medal insertion signal, and the processing for updating the medal insertion signal output count is executed. Can be prevented. That is, after the process of updating the number of times of outputting the medal insertion signal is completed, the interruption process is permitted and the updating of the medal insertion signal is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when a bet medal signal is output, a value obtained by doubling the actual bet number is set as the number of times of output (number of times of medal insertion signal output). This control is performed so that when the medal insertion signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeats ON and OFF, control is performed so that ON and OFF twice represent one bet number. This is the same when paying out medals. That is, when the medal payout signal is output to the outside, the number of medal payouts is doubled, the value is set as the number of times of medal payout signal output, and two times of on and off represent one medal payout number. Control.

[4-2-6. Medal payout by winning]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing medal payout by winning (MS_WIN_PAY). The “medal payout by winning” is a subroutine executed in step S48 in the main process shown in FIG.

  According to FIG. 26, first, in step S511, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of medal payout. In this process, a control command indicating the number of acquired (paid) sheets is stored in a register.

  In the next step S512, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET). Specifically, a process of writing (storing) control command data in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 is performed.

  Next, in step S513, the main control board 60 executes a medal number setting. This process is divided into the following two processes. As a first process, the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is stored in the D register. As a second process, the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is stored in the E register.

  Next, in step S514, the main control board 60 checks the operation state flag. Specifically, it determines “1” / “0” of each bit of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” stored at the address “F01F” of the RWM 63.

  Then, in step S515, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the type BB (special combination) is being operated. Specifically, the operation state flag of the type BB is determined based on whether or not the D3 bit (type 1 BB) of the operation state flag “_FL_ACTION” is “1 (operation)”. When the operation state flag of the type BB is “1”, it is determined that the type BB is in operation (YES in step S515), and the process proceeds to step S517 via step S516. On the other hand, when the type BB operation state flag is “0”, it is determined that the type BB is not in operation (NO in step S515), and the process proceeds to step S517 without performing step S516.

  In step S516, the main control board 60 performs a process at the time of one type BB operation. In this process, for example, a process of updating the acquired number data in the type 1 BB game (the type 1 BB game), acquiring the data of the acquired number in the type 1 BB game, and setting the upper limit to the acquired number in the type 1 BB game It is determined whether or not the number has exceeded the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value has exceeded the upper limit value, a process of clearing information on the number of acquired cards in the type 1 BB game is included.

  In step S517, the main control board 60 performs a process of setting the number of tokens to be paid out. Specifically, the E register value (the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” stored in step S513) is stored in the A register. As a result, the A register stores game medal number data.

  Next, in step S518, the main control board 60 determines whether a replay has been displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a value of a predetermined bit indicating replay display among symbol combination display flags (not shown) is “1”. If it is determined that it is not during the replay display (NO in step S518), it is during the replay winning and the process proceeds to step S520 via step S519. When it is determined that the replay display is being performed (YES in step S518), that is, when it is a small win, the process proceeds to step S520 without performing step S519.

  In step S519, the main control board 60 performs a medal payout number setting process. Specifically, the D register value (the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S513) is stored in the A register. As a result, the game register payout number data is stored in the A register.

  By performing the processing of steps S517 to S519 described above, the A register value becomes the value of the game medal number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” set in step S517 at the time of the replay winning. ), The value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” set in step S519.

  Next, in step S520, the main control board 60 doubles the number of game medals stored in the A register. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the address “F070” of the medal payout signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_OUT” is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S521, the main control board 60 prohibits the interrupt processing. This processing is the same as step S121 in FIG. 29, step S502 in FIG. 53, and the like, and controls so that an interrupt is not generated even if an interrupt request signal is input.

  Next, in step S522, the main control board 60 sets the number of times of outputting the medal payout signal. Specifically, the address indicated by the HL register (in this case, the value stored in “F070” stored in step S520 (medal payout signal output count “_CT_MEDAL_OUT”), and the A register value (in this case, step S520 (The number of game medals that has been doubled) and stores the value after the addition in the register A. Through this processing, the value of the number of medal payout signal outputs is updated.

  Then, after the process of step S522, the process proceeds to step S523, in which the inhibition of the interrupt performed in step S521 is released (interrupt permitted), and the process proceeds to step S524.

  In the present embodiment, the interrupt process is prohibited in steps S521 to S523 as described above, so that the interrupt process is executed during the updating of the medal payout signal, and the process of updating the medal payout signal output count is executed. Can be prevented. That is, after the process of updating the number of times of outputting the medal payout signal is completed, the interruption process is permitted to allow the medal payout signal to be updated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set to 10, but it is possible that the number of medals to be paid out in the next game will be updated during the output of the medal payout signal accompanying the payout of 10 medals. Low. However, when the medal payout number is changed during the development process (for example, the maximum payout number is changed from 10 to 15), the payout number may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if the interrupt prohibition processing is provided as in the present embodiment, even if the number of paid-out medals is changed during development (for example, to a maximum of 15), the number of program changes can be reduced.

  Further, the process of setting the number of times of outputting the medal payout signal in step S522 is meaningful to be performed before the “payout process (the process after step 524 in this flowchart)” for actually paying out game medals. As described above, the medal payout signal output count is created from the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” except during the replay winning. At this time, if the "payout process" is performed before the medal payout signal output number is set, the game medal payout number data "_NB_PAY_MEDAL" is updated in step S532. This is because a medal payout signal may be output.

  Next, in step S524, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a medal payout. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the D register value (the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” stored in step S513), and it is determined whether the value after the subtraction is “0”. . If the value after the subtraction is “0”, it is determined that there is no medal payout (NO in step S524), the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when the value after the subtraction is other than “0”, it is determined that there is a medal payout (YES in step S524), and the process proceeds to step S525.

  In step S525, the main control board 60 executes the stored number reading (R_CREDIT_READ) to read the number of stored game medals (stored number).

  Then, in the next step S526, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets read in step S525 has reached the limit number (50 in the present embodiment). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” acquired by reading the stored number of sheets in step S525 is a value indicating the limit number of “50”. When it is determined that the stored number is the limit number (YES in step S526), the process proceeds to step S530, and when it is determined that the stored number is not the limit number (NO in step S526), the process proceeds to step S527.

  In step S527, the main control board 60 sets a standby time at the time of adding the stored medals. Next, in step S528, wait processing is executed until the standby time set in step S527 elapses. Then, after the elapse of the standby time, the process proceeds to step S529.

  In step S529, the main control board 60 executes the addition of one storage number (MS_CREDIT_ADD) shown in FIG. 46, and proceeds to step S531 after the end.

  Step S530 is processing executed when it is determined in step S526 that the stored number is the limit number (YES in step S526). In step S530, the main control board 60 executes the payout of one medal (M_1MEDAL_PAY) shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, and proceeds to step S531 after the end.

  According to the processes in steps S525 to S530, the process of adding the stored number (addition of one stored number) is executed until the stored number reaches the limit number (50), and the stored number is the limit number. At this time, a process of paying out actual game medals from the hopper 50 (payout of one medal) is executed.

  Next, in step S531, the main control board 60 adds “1” to the acquired number display. This process is a process of updating the data displayed on the acquired number display LED 47 by “+1”. For example, if the display up to that time is “2”, the display is updated to “3”. Specifically, the value of the acquired number display data “_NB_PAY_LED” is incremented by “1” (updated).

  In the next step S532, the main control board 60 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of game medal payouts. Specifically, the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” is subtracted by “1” (updated).

  Then, in step S533, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the game medal payout number data “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” updated in step S532 has become “0”. When the value is “0”, it is determined that the medal payout is completed (YES in step S533), and the process proceeds to step 534. On the other hand, if the value is not “0”, it is determined that the medal payout has not been completed (the medal payout still remains) (NO in step S533), and the process returns to step S525.

  In step S534, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of the medal payout. This process is a process of storing a control command indicating the end of medal payout in a register. Then, in the next step S535, control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) is executed. With this process, a process of writing (storing) control command data in the control command buffer of the RWM 63 is performed. When step S535 ends, the process of this flowchart ends, and the process returns to the main process.

[4-3. Interrupt processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing (I_INTR). As described above, the main control board 60 executes the interrupt process shown in FIG. 55 at a cycle of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process (main loop) of FIG. 34 executed once in one game.

  According to FIG. 55, first, in step S61, the main control board 60 performs a save process of a register value and a prohibition process of a duplicate interrupt as an initial process. The register value saving processing in step S61 means saving the current register value to the stack area of the RWM 63 in order to use the register of the main CPU 65 (MPU) used in the main processing (main loop) in the interrupt processing. Processing. Further, the overlapping interrupt prohibition process is a process of turning on an interrupt prohibition flag so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, there is a case where an interrupt processing execution request is made during the execution of the power-off processing.

  In the next step S62, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a power-off has been detected. Specifically, the main control board 60 is provided with a voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) (not shown). The power-off detection signal is input to the bit. In step S62, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal has been input.

  If it is determined in step S62 that the power interruption has not been detected (NO in step S62), the process proceeds to step S63. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off is detected (YES in step S62), the process proceeds to step S78, and the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) is executed. Details of the power-off processing are shown in FIG.

  In step S63, the main control board 60 updates the interrupt counter value “_CT_INTR” (not shown) stored in the RWM 63.

  Next, in step S64, the main control board 60 executes timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). Timer measurement is a process of subtracting the time (timer value) set in the main process. Details of the timer measurement are shown in FIG.

  In the next step S65, the main control board 60 performs LED display control (IS_LED_OUT). Although a detailed description is omitted, the LED display control is based on the situation of the slot machine 10 by setting the set value, the number of stored sheets, the number of acquired sheets (number of paid out sheets), or the content of error display (error code), etc. This is a process of lighting using (1) to (5).

  For example, in the above-described non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP), an error display is output by the main processing (step S198 in FIG. 33), but the setting value during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the stored number, the acquired number (payout number). The display of the recoverable error is performed by the LED display control in step S65 for each interruption process.

  Next, in step S66, the main control board 60 performs a reading process of the input ports 0 to 2. In this processing, whether or not the bet switch 33, the start switch 34, the stop switch 35, and the like have been operated, a switch signal, and input signals of various sensors are read, and data (level data, level data, Rising data and falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 63.

  In the next step S67, the main control board 60 performs a check process of the built-in random number. In this embodiment, a flag (not shown) that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormal clock frequency of the random number for the lottery is detected (for example, when the random number is updated slowly), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is provided with SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHZ) input to the MPU, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, if “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied, the error flag is turned on.

  Then, in step S68, the main control board 60 determines whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number checked in step S67 (whether the error flag is on). When it is determined that no error has occurred (NO in step S68), the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, when it is determined that an error has occurred (YES in step S68), the process proceeds to step S79 to execute a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) due to the “E7” error. Details of the unrecoverable error processing are as described above with reference to FIG.

  In step S69, the main control board 60 controls the drive of the reel 39. This control is performed for each reel 39 (the left reel 39a, the middle reel 39b, and the right reel 39c), and includes a stop, a constant speed, an acceleration, a deceleration, a deceleration start, and a standby according to the operation status. Can be When the drive control of the reel 39 ends, the process proceeds to step S70.

  In step S70, the main control board 60 performs a port output process. In the port output process, specifically, for example, the excitation output of the motor 40 and the hopper motor 51 and the excitation output of the blocker 29 are performed.

  In the next step S71, the main control board 60 executes a selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK) for checking an input error (CH error) relating to the game medal selector 27. Details of the selector passage sensor check are shown in FIG. Although not shown in the present example, the slot machine 10 may similarly perform an error check on various sensors other than the selector passage sensor check.

  In the next step S72, the main control board 60 executes control command transmission (IS_CMD_SET). The control command transmission process includes, for example, transmitting the control command set in the output request set and the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) (that is, the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 63) to the sub-control board 80. This is the transmission process.

  More specifically, when a control command is set in the command buffer of the RWM 63 in the output request set and the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET), interrupt processing after that point (in principle, if the command buffer is empty, In step S72, the control command is transmitted, so that the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80.

  Next, in step S73, the main control board 60 stores data for an external signal stored in the RWM 63 in a register (external signal storage). Then, in the next step S74, the main control board 60 executes a process of writing (setting) the data stored in the register to the output port 6, thereby transmitting an external signal to the external terminal board 100 (external). Signal output).

  Next, in step S75, the main control board 60 performs an output process of a test signal (condition device information). In this processing, based on the data stored in the RWM 63, by executing processing of writing (setting) data to a predetermined output port (not installed in a game machine installed in the market), the slot is executed. This is a process of transmitting a test signal to the tester when determining whether the machine 10 is properly designed in accordance with the law.

  Note that, as information names to be transmitted to the tester, information on the operating state is referred to as a test signal, and information on the winning combination is referred to as condition device information. May be referred to as a second test signal. Further, other information than the above may be transmitted to the tester. For example, transmission of information (referred to as a third test signal) relating to an optimal stop operation mode (stop operation position, stop operation sequence) can be cited. As a result, a ball-out test (also called a simulation test) can be performed on the test machine side.

  As described above, the output port for outputting the test signal is not mounted on a game machine installed on the market, but the program for outputting the test signal is stored in the ROM 64 of the main control means 60. It is remembered. Then, even in the gaming machines installed in the market, the test signal is not always output, but the processing for outputting the test signal is executed by the main control board 60.

  Next, in step S76, the main control board 60 performs a random number update process. Then, in the next step S77, the main control board 60 restores the register value saved in step S61, and releases the inhibition of the duplicate interrupt (permits the next interrupt). Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ON / OFF of the stored number display LED 45, the acquired number display LED 47, the status display LED 48 (48a to 48g), and the set value display LED 66 are performed by the interruption process every 2.235 ms. Controlled.

  Further, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 80 is stored in the command buffer of the RWM 63, transmission processing of the control command is performed for each interrupt processing.

  Note that, as shown in step S191 in FIG. 33, the interrupt process is not permitted when the non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) is executed. This is because the non-recoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally. Processing based on abnormal data (such as updating the data of the RWM 63 based on the data from the input port 61 or transmitting to the sub control board 80) In order to prevent execution of the control command, the interrupt itself is prohibited.

  In other words, when a non-recoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-control board 80, so that executing the control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) has no meaning.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when an unrecoverable control command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the control command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the control command buffer itself may be incorrect when an unrecoverable error occurs.

[4-3-1. Timer measurement]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). Timer measurement is a subroutine performed during execution of the interrupt process (I_INTR), and is a process for subtracting the time (timer value) set in the main process.

  The flowchart illustrated in FIG. 56 illustrates an example of a processing procedure of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) for the example of arrangement of the timer illustrated in FIG.

  In the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 15, a plurality of 1-byte timers and a plurality of 2-byte timers are arranged such that each is stored in a continuous storage area (RWM 63), and The 1-byte timer group (also called 1-byte timer area and 1-byte timer storage area) and the 2-byte timer group (also called 2-byte timer area and 2-byte timer storage area) are stored in a continuous storage area. (The whole is also referred to as a “timer group”). Specifically, seven one-byte timers are arranged at addresses “F021” to “F027”, and three two-byte timers are arranged at addresses “F028” to “F02D”.

  However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the arrangement of the plurality of timers in the RWM 63 is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. 15 as long as it has the above-described arrangement characteristics, and the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT The processing procedure of ()) is not limited to the processing procedure of FIG. Specific modifications will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  According to FIG. 56, first, in step S601, the main control board 60 sets a measurement start timer address. In FIG. 56, the start address “F021 (H)” of the 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT (external signal output time)” arranged at the top of the 1-byte timer group in the storage area of the timer group in the RWM 63 is started. The case where a timer address is used will be described. In this case, in step S601, the address “F021 (H)” is set in the HL register.

  In the next step S602, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S603, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the address stored in the HL register. For example, when the HL register value is “F021 (H)”, “1” is subtracted from the value (“_TM1_OUT_CNT”) stored in the address “F021” of the RWM 63. If a carry occurs as a result of subtraction of “1”, “0” is stored in the address (at this time, correction processing such as processing for adding a carry flag and processing for adding “1”) Is not required). The borrow can occur when the original timer value is “0” and “1” is subtracted.

  The processing in step S603 will be described in detail using specific values. For example, when the process of step S603 is performed for the first time (the first cycle of the repetitive process of steps S603 to S605), the HL register value is set to “F021 (H)” by setting the measurement start timer address in step S601. ing. Therefore, in the process of step S603, “1” is subtracted from the data stored in one byte of the address “F021 (H)” (that is, the timer value of “_TM1_OUT_CNT (external signal output time)”). Further, for example, when the process of step S603 is performed for the second time (the second cycle of the repetition process of steps S603 to S605), the HL register value is changed by the process of step S604 of the first cycle (details will be described later). “1” is added to “F022 (H)”. Therefore, in the process of step S603, “1” is subtracted from the data stored in one byte of the address “F022 (H)” (that is, the timer value of “_TM1_STOP (turning stop reception waiting time)”).

  Here, as a first example of the specific value, assuming that the data stored at the address “F022 (H)” is “07 (H)” (the operation reception to one stop button is confirmed, In step S603, a process of subtracting “1” from “07 (H)” is performed, and the 1-byte data after the subtraction is “06”. (H) ".

  Further, as a second example of the specific value, if the data stored at the address “F022 (H)” is “00 (H)” (when the waiting time for the rotation stop reception elapses, the next stop button is pressed). Can be accepted, which corresponds to a situation until an operation to the next stop button is accepted.) In step S603, a process of subtracting “1” from “00 (H)” is performed. Will be At this time, if "1" is subtracted, a carry flag is raised in operation, and a carry-down occurs. However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores “00 (H)” in the target address of the RWM 63 when a borrow occurs in the calculation. That is, when the process of step S603 (update of the timer value) is performed while the 1-byte data “00 (H)” is stored, “00 (H)” is added to the address “F022 (H)” after the subtraction. (H) "is stored. As a result, looking at the one-byte data as the timer value, if the timer value is “0”, the updated timer value is also “0”.

  Next, in step S604, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, “1” is added to the HL register value. The value after the addition is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is the address of the next lower one-byte timer (except when the current specified destination is the last one-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK”).

  Note that the process of step S604 is executed even when there is no next 1-byte timer (when the current designation is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK” and the next timer is the 2-byte timer “_TM2_HE_CHK”). . At this time, specifically, the address specified by the HL register changes from “F027 (H)” to “F028 (H)” by the calculation in step S604, and the address “F028 (H)” specified by the HL register after the calculation. Is the lower digit address (upper address) of the first 2-byte timer "_TM2_HE_CHK" adjacent to the last 1-byte timer "_TM1_BLON_CHK".

  In step S605, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the value of the B register after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that a 1-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S605), and returns to step S603. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 1-byte timer value in step S603 has been repeated by the number of 1-byte timers. Is completed (YES in step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S607, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, two-byte data in which the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the “HL + 1” register is the upper digit "1" is subtracted. If a 2-byte data borrow occurs as a result of subtraction of “1”, “0” is stored in the address (at this time, a process of adding a carry flag or a process of adding “1”) Correction processing is not required). The borrow can occur when “1” is subtracted from the original timer value of “0” (see a third example of the specific value described later).

  The processing in step S607 will be described in detail using specific values. For example, when the process of “_TM1_BLON_CHK”, which is updated last by the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer, is completed, the HL register value is set to “F028 (H)” by the process of step S604. At this time, the address stored in the “HL + 1” register is “F029 (H)”. Therefore, in the process of step S607, “1” is subtracted from the data stored in the two bytes consisting of the lower digit address “F028 (H)” and the upper digit address “F029 (H)”.

  Here, as a first example of the specific value, the data stored at the address “F028 (H)” is “05 (H)” and the data stored at the address “F029 (H)” is “01 (H)”. )), It is considered that “0105 (H)” is stored as the 2-byte data, and a process of subtracting “1” from this “0105 (H)” is performed. That is, the 2-byte data after the subtraction is “0104 (H)”. Therefore, in the 2-byte data after the subtraction, “04 (H)” is stored in the lower digit address “F028 (H)” and “01 (H)” is stored in the upper digit address “F029 (H)”. .

  As a second example of the specific value, 2-byte data “0100 (H)” is stored (that is, “00 (H)” is stored in the address “F028 (H)”, and the address “F029 (H)” is stored. )) Is stored as “01 (H)”), the 2-byte data is subtracted by “1” to obtain “00FF (H)”. Therefore, “FF (H)” is added to the lower digit address “F028 (H)”. (H) "is stored, and" 00 (H) "is stored in the upper digit address" F029 (H) ".

  As a third example of the specific value, “0000 (H)” is stored as 2-byte data (that is, “00 (H)” is stored in the address “F028 (H)”, and the address “F029 ( In the case where “00 (H)” is stored in “H)”, subtracting “1” from the 2-byte data causes a carry flag to be raised in operation and causes a carry-down. However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the main control board 60 stores “00 (H)” in the target address of the RWM 63 when a borrow occurs in the calculation. That is, when the process of step S607 (update of the timer value) is performed while the 2-byte data “0000 (H)” is stored, the lower digit address “F028 (H)” after the subtraction is stored in the lower digit address “F028 (H)”. “00 (H)” is stored, and “00 (H)” is stored in the upper digit address “F029 (H)”. As a result, looking at the 2-byte data as the timer value, if the timer value is “0”, the updated timer value is also “0”.

  In step S608, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, “1” is added to the HL register value, and “1” is further added to the HL register value. The value after the addition is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is incremented by “2”, so that the address of the lower 2 byte timer (except when the current specified destination is the last 2 byte timer “_TM2_GAME”) Is the lower digit address (upper address). Note that the process of step S608 is executed even when there is no next two-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last two-byte timer “_TM2_GAME”).

  Note that the process of step S608 is executed even when there is no next two-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last two-byte timer “_TM2_GAME”). At this time, specifically, the address specified by the HL register is changed from “F02C (H)” to “F02E (H)” by the calculation in step S608, and the address “F02E (H)” specified by the HL register after the calculation. Is an address outside the timer storage area, but is not used in subsequent processing.

  In step S609, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the two-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the B register value after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that the 2-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S609), and returns to step S607. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the update processing of the 2-byte timer value in step S607 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Is completed (YES in step S609), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, after setting the measurement start timer address “F021 (H)” in the HL register in step S601, a plurality of one-byte timers are set in steps S602 to S605. Are sequentially updated (the "timer value" may be referred to as "count value" or "interrupt count") (measurement of 1-byte timer), and in steps S606 to S609, the timers of a plurality of 2-byte timers are updated. By sequentially updating the values (measurement of the 2-byte timer), the timer values of the plurality of 1-byte timers and the plurality of 2-byte timers continuously arranged (stored) in the RWM 63 are updated.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by arranging a plurality of timers at consecutive addresses, the process of changing the HL register value by a predetermined value as shown in steps S604 and S608 is performed, and the next timer is executed. Can be specified.

  Specifically, in order to specify the storage destination of the next timer, during the measurement of the 1-byte timer, one process of incrementing the HL register value by “+1” may be repeated by the number of 1-byte timers. In the meantime, one process of making the HL register value “+2” may be repeated by the number of 2-byte timers (repetition of an addition instruction). That is, in the present embodiment, the instruction for directly writing the address of the RWM 63 to the HL register is required only once when the measurement start timer address is set (step S601). By performing “repeating” (in FIG. 56, only the subtraction instruction is used, but in a modified example described later, it may be an addition instruction), it is possible to specify the storage destination of a plurality of timers. Therefore, the storage destination of each timer is referenced (reference instruction), and the storage destination of the next timer is specified in the HL register based on the reference result, as performed in a program in a conventional gaming machine (designation instruction). Such processing becomes unnecessary. In comparison with a conventional program that executes the above-mentioned reference instruction and the specified instruction for each timer, the program of the present embodiment that repeatedly executes the same addition instruction with the 1-byte timer or the 2-byte timer respectively has a smaller program capacity. The processing load can be reduced.

  That is, according to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) of the present embodiment, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the conventional timer measurement process in the gaming machine. The effect of reducing the program capacity tends to increase as the number of continuously arranged timers increases, and is particularly effective in gaming machines that use a large number of timers with the upper limit of the program capacity specified. It can be said that.

  In the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, regardless of the timer value before update in step S603 or step S607 (that is, regardless of the timer value before subtraction). ), A process of updating (subtracting) the timer value of the target timer is performed (hereinafter, this process is also referred to as “special subtraction process” (note that the process of step S603 is a 1-byte special subtraction process, and the process of step S607 is It is sometimes referred to as two-byte special subtraction processing))).

  In the special subtraction process, when the timer value before the subtraction is “N (N ≧ 1)”, the timer value after the subtraction is set as the timer value after the subtraction, as described in the specific example of the processing procedure in the steps S603 and S607. While “N−1” is stored in the storage destination of the timer value (timer storage area of the RWM 63), when the timer value before the subtraction is “0”, the storage destination of the timer value is determined as the timer value after the subtraction. “0” is stored in (timer storage area of the RWM 63).

  As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when updating (subtracting) each timer value by timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT), the timer value is "0" as seen in the conventional gaming machine. Instead of performing the individual subtraction processing after determining whether or not there is, the timer value is uniformly subtracted by the above-described special subtraction processing. By performing such a special subtraction process, a process associated with the determination of the timer value before the subtraction (for example, whether the timer value is “0”, and if the timer value is “0”, a process such as not subtracting) ) Is unnecessary, so that an increase in the program capacity can be suppressed, and the program capacity can be expected to be reduced as compared with the conventional timer measurement processing in a game machine.

  Further, as described in detail as the third example of the specific value, in the special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, when a carry-down occurs when an operation of subtracting the timer value is performed (specifically, for example, “ FF (H) "results in a carry flag of" 1 "), and" 00 (H) "is stored in the target address of the RWM 63. Instruction processing such as storing the value obtained by adding “1” to the target address or instruction processing adding the carry flag “1” becomes unnecessary. Therefore, according to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) of the present embodiment, an increase in the program capacity can be suppressed, and it can be expected that the program capacity is reduced as compared with the timer measurement processing in a conventional gaming machine.

  Here, the effect of reducing the program capacity by the special subtraction processing of the present embodiment will be supplemented.

  First, regarding the subtraction processing of 1-byte data, in the conventional subtraction processing of 1-byte data, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting “1 (H)” from “00 (H)” is generally “FF (H)”. (1 byte normal subtraction processing). Therefore, if the result of subtraction of “1 (H)” from “00 (H)” by the 1-byte normal subtraction processing is to be changed to “00 (H)”, “1 (H)” is added to “FF (H)” again. , Etc. (for example, if carry flag processing is required, an instruction for the processing is also required).

  On the other hand, in the 1-byte special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting “1 (H)” from “00 (H)” becomes “00 (H)” by one instruction. It can be expected to reduce the program capacity.

  Similarly, in the subtraction processing of 2-byte data, in the conventional subtraction processing of 2-byte data, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting “1 (H)” from “0000 (H)” is “FFFF (H)”. Is general (2-byte normal subtraction processing), and in order to make the subtraction result “0000 (H)”, another instruction such as adding “1 (H)” to “FFFF (H)” is required. You need to do it.

  On the other hand, in the 2-byte special subtraction processing of the present embodiment, the subtraction result obtained by subtracting “1 (H)” from “0000 (H)” becomes “0000 (H)” by one instruction. It can be expected to reduce the program capacity.

  In other words, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the special subtraction process is performed when the timer value is “N (N ≧ 1)”, the result of the special subtraction process is “N−1”. (The timer value can be updated to "N-1"), and when the special subtraction process is executed when the timer value is "0", the result of the special subtraction process becomes "0" (the timer value is " 0 ").

  As described above, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) for updating a plurality of timer values, when the timer value is “0” and when the timer value is other than “0”, Thus, since the subtraction process (or the addition process may be performed) with the same one instruction (one step), an increase in the program capacity can be suppressed.

[4-3-2. Selector passage sensor check]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK). The selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK) is a process for checking an input error (CH error) related to the game medal selector 27.

  According to FIG. 57, first, in step S611, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the selector passage sensor signal has risen (whether a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (selector path sensor signal) of the input port 2 rising data “_PT_IN2_UP” stored at the address “F00D” of the RWM 63 is “1 (ON)”. Note that data such as the input port 2 rising data “_PT_IN2_UP” (data relating to the input signals of the input ports 0 to 2) is generated at the time of executing the interrupt processing (I_INTR) and stored in the RWM 63 (step S66 in FIG. 55). .

  If it is determined in step S611 that the selector passage sensor signal has risen (YES in step S611), the process proceeds to step S612. If it is determined that the selector passage sensor signal has not risen (NO in step S611), step S615 is performed. Proceed to.

  In step S612, the main control board 60 adds “1” to the value of the input monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK”. As described above, the insertion monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK” is a counter for monitoring the passage abnormality detection by the passage sensor 28 of the game medal selector 27, and is initialized when the blocker ON (M_BLOCLER_ON) is executed (see FIG. 39, the value is decremented by "1" when it is determined in the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK) that the game medal has passed normally (step S350 in FIG. 45). Then, as described in the maintenance medal check (MS_INSERT_CHK), it is determined whether or not there is a passing abnormality based on the value of the insertion monitoring counter “_CT_SEN_CHK” that fluctuates according to the situation as described above (step S351 in FIG. 45) ).

  Next, in step S613, the main control board 60 sets the selector passage residence time. Specifically, the address “F025” of “_TM1_CH_CHK” is stored in the HL register, and “200 (D)” is stored in the address “F025” indicated by the HL register. This is a process of setting the timer value of the selector passage residence time “_TM1_CH_CHK” stored at the address “F025” of the RWM 63 to the initial value “200”.

  Next, in step S614, the main control board 60 sets the blocker OFF monitoring time and the blocker ON monitoring time. Specifically, “144 (D)” is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value (ie, “F026”), and the value obtained by further adding “1” to the HL register value is “45 (D)” is stored at the indicated address (ie, “F027”). These set the timer value of the blocker OFF monitoring time “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” stored at the address “F026” of the RWM 63 to the initial value “144”, and set the blocker ON monitoring time “_TM1_BLON_CHK” stored at the address “F027”. Is set to the timer value of "."

  As in the specific processing described above, in the present embodiment, when the timer value is stored in a plurality of addresses of the RWM 63 based on the detection of the selector passage sensor signal, the HL register By simply adding "1" to the address, the address at which each timer value is set can be specified. Therefore, the processing capacity (main control program capacity) can be reduced as compared with the case where the address for storing each timer value is stored in the HL register every time and the timer value is set.

  In the next step S615, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the selector passage sensor signal is ON (whether or not a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D7 bit (selector path sensor signal) of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” stored in the address “F00C” of the RWM 63 is “1 (ON)”.

  If it is determined in step S615 that the selector passage sensor signal is ON (YES in step S615), the process proceeds to step S616. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selector passage sensor signal is not ON (NO in step S615), since the game medal has not been detected by the passage sensor 28, no CH error occurs, and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S616, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the selector passage residence time has elapsed. Specifically, the data stored in “_TM1_CH_CHK” is stored in the A register, and it is determined whether the data stored in the A register is “0”. If the A register value is "0", it is determined that the selector passage residence time has elapsed (YES in step S616), and the flow advances to step S617. On the other hand, if the A register value is other than “0” in step S616, it is determined that the selector passage residence time has not elapsed (NO in step S616), and the processing of this flowchart ends. In this case, even if a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28 (the selector passage sensor signal is ON), it is not determined that a CH error has occurred because the selector passage residence time has not elapsed.

  Step S617 is processing executed when a game medal is detected by the passage sensor 28 (the selector passage sensor signal is ON) and the selector passage residence time has elapsed. In such a situation, it is determined that the game medal has a stay error (CH error) in the game medal path (selector path) of the game medal selector 27.

  Therefore, in step S617, the main control board 60 sets data for reporting CH error detection (CH error detection reporting data set). Specifically, a process of setting the D4 bit (CH error) of the sub notification flag 2 “_FL_SUB_INF2” stored at the address “F013” of the RWM 63 to “1” is performed. After the processing in step S617, the processing in this flowchart ends.

  The above is the detailed processing procedure of the selector passage sensor check (I_SENS_CHK).

  In step S611, it is described that the determination as to whether or not the selector passage sensor signal has risen is made based on the D7 bit of the input port 2 rise data “_PT_IN2_UP” stored in the RWM 63. The criterion for determining the rise of the selector passage sensor signal in 10 is not limited to this, but is determined based on the input signal from the input port 2 and the D7 bit of the input port 2 level data “_PT_IN2_OLD” stored in the RWM 63. You may do it.

  Specifically, for example, the main control board 60 directly checks at least the data of the input port 2 and sets a predetermined timer value when an input is made to the D7 bit of the input port 2 (this flowchart). In other words, the initial timer value “200” may be set in the selector passage residence time “_TM1_CH_CHK” in step S613). Note that, when such a method is adopted, the timer value is not strictly determined when the input signal from the passage sensor 28 (sensor detection) is detected instead of determining the rising of the input signal. Is set. Also, the D7 bit (selector passage sensor signal) data of the input port 2 level data "_PT_IN2_OLD" is checked, and if the data is "1 (ON)", a predetermined timer value is set ( In this flowchart, the initial timer value “200” may be set to “_TM1_CH_CHK” in the selector passage residence time set in step S613.

[4-3-3. Power off processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN). The power-off processing shown in FIG. 58 is performed when it is determined that the power-off is detected in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) (see step S78 in FIG. 55).

  According to FIG. 58, first, in step S621, the main control board 60 turns off the outputs of all the output ports 62 (for example, the output ports 0 to 6).

  Then, in step S622, a power-off processing completed flag (not shown) is stored in the RWM 63. The process of step S622 is a process of storing, in the RWM 63, data (power-off process completed flag) indicating that the power-off process by the interrupt process is being executed. The power-off processing completed flag set in step S622 is cleared in the last processing in the power-off recovery processing (M_POWER_ON) (see step S151 in FIG. 31).

  Next, in step S623, the main control board 60 sets the control command read pointer to an even number (first time). As described above, when transmitting a control command, a first control command and a second control command (two control commands) are transmitted. In addition, as described later, the process of transmitting the first control command and the process of transmitting the second control command by one interrupt process are executed twice. However, after transmitting the first control command, the power may be cut off before transmitting the second control command. In this case, transmission is performed again from the first control command.

  Therefore, in such a case, the process of step S623 sets the read pointer that specifies the address of the buffer in which the control command is stored to an even number. For example, when the read pointer is “00011111 (B)”, it is set to “00011110 (B)”. If the number is even from the beginning, such as “00011110 (B)”, it is left as it is. As a result of this processing, the buffer at the designated address is always an even number, and becomes the buffer storing the first control command. This makes it possible to transmit the control command twice reliably by simple program processing.

  In the next step S624, the main control board 60 calculates the checksum data of the RWM 63. This processing is for calculating a checksum including a work area (RWM 63) used by the program, and the target program use area includes a program work area, an unused area, a stack area, and the like.

  Then, in the next step S625, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed (NO in step S625), the process proceeds to step S624. Return to continue calculating the checksum. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has been completed (YES in step S625), the process proceeds to step S626.

  In step S626, the main control board 60 stores the checksum of the RWM 63 calculated in step S624 in the RWM 63. Here, the data stored in the RWM 63 is processed into a value (also referred to as complement data) that becomes data indicating “0” when the checksum of the RWM 63 is performed again. Accordingly, when the checksum of the RWM 61 is executed at the start of the program (see step S14 in FIG. 27), whether the value of the RWM 63 is correct is determined by determining whether the calculation result of the checksum is “0”. Since it is only necessary to make a determination, the program processing is simplified and the processing time is shortened.

  Then, when the process proceeds to the next step S627, the process enters a reset waiting state. In the main control board 60, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit). Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value, the voltage monitoring apparatus inputs a power-off detection signal to the D6 bit of the input port 0, and then resets after a predetermined time elapses by a circuit including a capacitor and a resistor. The signal is configured to be input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed so that the time at which the process at the time of power-off is normally executed is set.

[4-3-4. Modification]
The interrupt processing (I_INTR) executed by the main control board 60 of the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment and its subroutine have been described in detail with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. However, the processing procedure of the information processing in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the processing procedure of each flowchart illustrated so far.

  In the following, a modified example of the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) described in [4-3-1] using a processing procedure different from that in FIG. 56 will be described. More specifically, it describes a modified example (first and second) of timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) in the case where an address different from that in FIG. 56 is set as the measurement start timer address. 60 and FIG. 61.

  In FIG. 56, in step S601, “F021 (H)”, which is the highest address of the 1-byte timer storage area in the timer storage area, is set in the HL register as the measurement start timer address. The machine 10 is not limited to this. For example, timer measurement can be started from the 2-byte timer storage area side. A procedure for performing such timer measurement will be described with reference to a first modified example (FIG. 60) and a second modified example (FIG. 61).

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a timer storage area. The timer storage area shown in FIG. 59 is a part of the storage area of the RWM 63, and corresponds to the arrangement of each timer shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59, addresses “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)” correspond to a 1-byte timer storage area in which a plurality of 1-byte timers are stored, and addresses “F02A (H)” to “F02A (H)”. F02D (H) "corresponds to a two-byte timer storage area in which a plurality of two-byte timers are stored.

  (X) shown in FIG. 59 indicates the measurement start timer address “F021 (H)” in the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) in FIG. 56. Similarly, (Y) indicates the measurement start timer address “F02C (H)” in a first modification example (FIG. 60) described later, and (Z) indicates a measurement start timer address in a second modification example (FIG. 61) described later. It points to the measurement start timer address “F02E (H)”.

[4-3-4-1. First Modification]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating a first modification of the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). As described above, in the first modified example, the measurement start timer address set when starting the timer measurement is “F02E (H)”.

  According to FIG. 60, first, in step S801, the main control board 60 sets a measurement start timer address. Specifically, the address “F02E (H)” is set in the HL register. Note that “F02E (H)” is not the address of the timer storage area, but the lower digit address (upper address) “F02C (2) of the 2-byte timer“ _TM2_GAME (minimum game time) ”arranged at the bottom of the 2-byte timer group. H) ”to“ +2 ”.

  In steps S802 to S805, "measurement of 2-byte timer" is performed, and in steps S806 to S809, "measurement of 1-byte timer" is performed.

  In step S802, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S803, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by “1”, and the HL register value is further subtracted by “1”. The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is obtained by subtracting “2”, and in the case of the first loop, the lower digit address of the first 2-byte timer “_TM2_GAME (minimum game time)” stored at the lowest order ( Upper address). In the second and subsequent loops, the lower digit address (upper address) of the next upper 2-byte timer is used.

  Note that the process of step S803 is not executed when there is no next two-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last two-byte timer “_TM2_HE_CHK” and the next timer is the one-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK”). . However, the presence or absence of the next two-byte timer is not determined in step S803. In such a case, “YES” is determined in step S805 described later, the process proceeds to step S806, and the process in step S803 is performed. Because there is no.

  In step S804, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, two-byte data in which the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the “HL + 1” register is the upper digit "1" is subtracted. The processing in step S804 is the same as the processing in step S607 in FIG. 56, and the processing in each example of the specific value and the processing when a borrow occurs are also applied. That is, in step S804, the “special subtraction process” described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed on the 2-byte timer value.

  In step S805, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the B register value after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that the 2-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S805), and returns to step S803. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the update processing of the 2-byte timer value in step S804 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Has been completed (YES in step S805), and the flow advances to step S806.

  In step S806, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S807, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is the address of the next higher byte 1-byte timer.

  Note that the processing in step S807 is not executed when there is no next one-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last one-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”). However, the presence / absence of the next one-byte timer is not determined in step S807. In such a case, “YES” is determined in step S809, which will be described later, and the process of this flowchart ends.

  In step S808, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the address stored in the HL register. The processing in step S808 is the same as the processing in step S603 in FIG. 56, and the processing when a borrow occurs is also applied. That is, in step S808, the “special subtraction process” described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed on the one-byte timer value.

  In step S809, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the value of the B register after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that a 1-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S809), and returns to step S807. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the update processing of the 1-byte timer value in step S808 has been repeated by the number of 1-byte timers. Is completed (YES in step S809), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the first modified example shown in FIG. 60, similarly to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, the process of changing the HL register value by a predetermined value is performed, thereby storing the next timer. A destination (address) can be specified, and "special subtraction processing" is performed in updating the timer value. Therefore, the effect of the present embodiment described in [4-3-1] can be obtained also by the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) according to the first modified example.

[4-3-4-2. Second Modification]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating a second modification of the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT). As described above, in the second modified example, the measurement start timer address set when starting the timer measurement is “F02C (H)”.

  According to FIG. 61, first, in step S811, the main control board 60 sets a measurement start timer address. Specifically, the address “F02C (H)” is set in the HL register. “F02C (H)” is the lower digit address (upper address) of the 2-byte timer “_TM2_GAME (minimum game time)” arranged at the lowest position of the 2-byte timer group.

  In steps S812 to S815, "measurement of 2-byte timer" is performed, and in steps S817 to S820, "measurement of 1-byte timer" is performed. In step S816 between the measurement of the 2-byte timer and the measurement of the 1-byte timer, a process of correcting the designated address stored in the HL register is performed.

  In step S812, the main control board 60 sets the number of 2-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since three 2-byte timers are prepared, "3" is set in the B register.

  In step S813, the main control board 60 updates the 2-byte timer value. Specifically, two-byte data in which the value stored in the address stored in the HL register is the lower digit and the value stored in the address stored in the “HL + 1” register is the upper digit "1" is subtracted. The process in step S813 is the same as the process in step S607 in FIG. 56, and the process in each example of the specific value and the process when a borrow occurs are also applied. That is, in step S813, the “special subtraction process” described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed on the 2-byte timer value.

  In step S814, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, the HL register value is subtracted by “1”, and the HL register value is further subtracted by “1”. I do. The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is a value obtained by subtracting “2” from the address. Therefore, unless the current specified destination is the last two-byte timer “_TM2_HE_CHK”, the next higher-order two-byte timer is used. Is the lower digit address (upper address).

  Note that the process of step S814 is performed even when there is no next two-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last two-byte timer “_TM2_HE_CHK” and the next timer is the one-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK”). . At this time, specifically, the address specified by the HL register changes from “F028 (H)” to “F026 (H)” by the calculation in step S814. The address “F026 (H)” specified by the HL register after this operation is not the address of the first one-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK” adjacent to the last two-byte timer “_TM2_HE_CHK”, but the one-byte timer “_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” further adjacent thereto. ] Address. In step S816 described later, a process of correcting such a deviation of the designated address is performed.

  In step S815, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the B register value after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that the 2-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 2-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S815), and returns to step S813. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the update processing of the 2-byte timer value in step S813 has been repeated by the number of 2-byte timers. Is completed (YES in step S815), and the process proceeds to step S816.

  In step S816, the designated address stored in the HL register is corrected. Specifically, “1” is added to the HL register value, and the result is stored in the HL register. As described in step S814, the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S816 is “F026 (H)”, and the designated address is the 1-byte timer “1” that should be designated as the “next timer address”. _TM1_BLON_CHK ”is“ 1 ”smaller than the address“ F027 (H) ”. Therefore, the offset of the designated address is corrected (eliminated) by adding “1” to the HL register value in step S816, and the address “F027 (H)” of the first 1-byte timer “_TM1_BLON_CHK” is designated. Therefore, the measurement of the 1-byte timer can be started from the subsequent step S817.

  In step S817, the main control board 60 sets the number of 1-byte timers. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 15, since seven 1-byte timers are prepared, "7" is set in the B register.

  In step S818, the main control board 60 updates the 1-byte timer value. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the address stored in the HL register. The processing in step S818 is the same as the processing in step S603 in FIG. 56, and the processing when a borrow occurs is also applied. That is, in step S818, the “special subtraction process” described with reference to FIG. 56 is performed on the 1-byte timer value.

  In step S819, the main control board 60 sets the next timer address. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value. The value after the subtraction is stored in the HL register. As a result, the address specified by the HL register is the address of the next higher-order 1-byte timer (except when the current specification destination is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”).

  Note that the process of step S819 is executed even when there is no next 1-byte timer (when the current designated destination is the last 1-byte timer “_TM1_OUT_CNT”). At this time, specifically, the address specified by the HL register is changed from “F021 (H)” to “F020 (H)” by the calculation in step S819, and the address “F020 (H)” specified by the HL register after the calculation. Is an address outside the timer storage area, but is not used in subsequent processing.

  In step S820, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed. Specifically, the B register value is subtracted by “1”, and it is determined whether or not the subtracted B register value is “0”. If the value of the B register after the subtraction is other than “0”, it means that a 1-byte timer whose timer value has not been updated remains, so it is determined that the timer measurement of the 1-byte timer has not been completed. (NO in step S820), and returns to step S818. On the other hand, if the value of the B register after the subtraction is “0”, it means that the updating process of the 1-byte timer value in step S818 has been repeated by the number of 1-byte timers. Is completed (YES in step S820), and the process of this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the second modified example shown in FIG. 61, similar to the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIG. 56, the process of changing the HL register value by a predetermined value is performed, thereby storing the next timer. A destination (address) can be specified, and "special subtraction processing" is performed in updating the timer value. Therefore, similarly to the first modification, the effect of the present embodiment described in [4-3-1] can be obtained also by the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) according to the second modification.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, an example has been described in which a 1-byte timer group is arranged on the upper address side of the RWM 63 and a 2-byte timer group is arranged on the lower address side. The arrangement relationship of the byte timer groups may be reversed (that is, the 1-byte timer group may be arranged on the lower address side, and the 2-byte timer group may be arranged on the upper address side). Even in such a case, the effects of the present embodiment can be obtained by appropriately applying the timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) shown in FIGS. 56, 60, and 61. Also, the storage area for each timer value is not limited to a combination of 1 byte and 2 bytes, and may be configured with a single data size (for example, all 2-byte timers) or include timers of other data sizes. Or you may be. In other words, even if the number of 1-byte timers is “N (N ≧ 0)” and the number of 2-byte timers is “M (M ≧ 1)”, the number of 1-byte timers is “N (N ≧ 1)”. The number of 2-byte timers may be “M (M ≧ 0)”. Even when the number of 1-byte timers is one, it may be referred to as a one-byte timer storage area. Even when the number of two-byte timers is one, it may be referred to as a two-byte timer storage area. Is also good.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, as the storage area for storing the timer value, it is not necessary that all the timer values are stored in a continuous address space, and at least a part of the storage area for storing the timer value is a continuous area. What is necessary is that it is located at the address specified.

  Further, the specific timer values shown in the above description are merely examples, and the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment is not limited to the timer values shown in FIGS. Values can be used. Specifically, for example, each address of the timer storage area for storing the timer value can be arbitrarily determined. Also, for example, the label, the use (contents), and the data (initial value, etc.) of the value (timer value) stored in the timer storage area for storing the timer value can be arbitrarily determined. Further, for example, the data size of the timer storage area for storing one timer value is not limited to only 1 byte (1 byte timer storage area) or 2 bytes (2 byte timer storage area), but 3 bytes (3 byte timer storage area). Area) or more.

  In the present embodiment, in the description of the timer shown in FIG. 15, the timer value of each timer stored in the RWM 63 is decremented by "1" each time one interrupt process is performed (every one interrupt). However, in the slot machine 10 according to the present embodiment, updating of the timer value is not limited to every interruption. For example, the timer value may be updated every two interrupts or every four interrupts. Also, the interrupt cycle is not limited to 2.235 ms. In other words, it is sufficient if the timer value can be updated at a predetermined cycle.

  In the present embodiment, in the description of the timer, a subtraction timer that subtracts a timer value for each interrupt process has been described as an example. However, the information processing according to the present embodiment is based on an addition timer that adds a timer value for each interrupt process. Can also be applied. However, when the present invention is applied to the addition timer, the result of addition operation of 1-byte data (or 2-byte data) in the updating of the timer value in timer measurement (I_TIME_COUNT) (for example, steps S603 and S607 in FIG. 56) is a digit. When overflow occurs, it is necessary to perform "special addition processing" for storing "0" in the target address.

  The above is one mode of the slot machine 10 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. Gaming machines other than slot machines, for example, pachinko machines, gaming machines combining pachinko machines and slot machines, managed gaming machines that do not require gaming medals (medalless gaming machines, enclosed gaming machines), casinos The present invention can be applied to a machine or the like.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Base 2 Front door 10 Slot machine 11 Power switch 12 Setting key switch 13 Setting change / reset switch 14 Setting door switch 15 Door switch 16 Board case 17 Display window 19 Production lamp 20 Speaker 21 Image display device 22 Cross key (cursor key)
23 Menu Button 24 Effect Button 26 Game Medal Slot 27 Game Medal Selector 28 Passage Sensor 29 Blocker 30 (30a, 30b) Insertion Sensor 32 Operation Switch 33 Bet Switch 33a 1 Bet Switch 33b 3 Bet Switch 34 Start Switch 35 Stop Switch 35a Left Stop switch 35b Middle stop switch 35c Right stop switch 36 Set-up switch 38 Symbol display device 39 Reel 39a Left reel 39b Middle reel 39c Right reel 40 Motor 41 Reel sensor 43 Display device for gaming medals, etc. 44 Display board 45 Displayed number of stored LEDs
47 Acquisition number display LED
48 Status LED
49 Game medal payout device 50 Hopper 51 Hopper motor 52 (52a, 52b) Payout sensor 53 Payout port 54 Connection parts 54a, 54b, 54c Screw 60 Main control board 61 Input port 62 Output port 63 RWM
64 ROM
65 Main CPU
66 Set value display LED
67 Management information display LED
69 role lottery means 70 reel control means 71 display determination means 72 payout means 75 RT control means 77 external signal transmission means 78 control command transmission means 80 sub-control board 80A sub-main control board 80B sub-sub control board 81 (81A, 81B) input port 82 (82A, 82B) Output port 83 (83A, 83B) RWM
84 (84A, 84B) ROM
85 Sub CPU
85A sub main CPU
85B Sub-sub CPU
87 production control means 88 production management means 89 production execution means 100 external terminal board 200 hall computer

Claims (1)

A first storage area capable of storing a 1-byte value;
A second storage area capable of storing a 2-byte value,
When the first condition is satisfied, the first value can be stored in the first storage area,
When the second condition is satisfied, the second value can be stored in the second storage area,
A 1-byte timer area having a first storage area,
A 2-byte timer area having a second storage area,
An update process capable of updating at least a value stored in the first storage area and a value stored in the second storage area at a predetermined cycle ;
In the updating process, a first special subtraction instruction as one instruction and a second special subtraction instruction as one instruction can be executed,
When updating the value stored in the first storage area, a first special subtraction instruction can be executed,
When updating the value stored in the second storage area, a second special subtraction instruction can be executed,
The first special subtraction instruction can be executed without determining whether the value stored in the first storage area is “0”,
In a situation where “N (where N is a value of 1 or more)” is stored in the first storage area, the value of the first storage area becomes “N−1” when the first special subtraction instruction is executed. ,
In situations where "0" in the first storage area is stored, even if the first special subtraction instruction is executed, the value of the first memory area is "0",
In a situation where “M (where M is a value of 1 or more)” is stored in the second storage area, the value of the second storage area becomes “M−1” when the second special subtraction instruction is executed. ,
In a situation where "0" is stored in the second storage area, the value of the second storage area is "0" even when the second special subtraction instruction is executed .

Images